Title:   Timaeus

Subject:  

Author:   Plato

Keywords:  

Creator:  

PDF Version:   1.2



Contents:

Page No 1

Page No 2

Page No 3

Page No 4

Page No 5

Page No 6

Page No 7

Page No 8

Page No 9

Page No 10

Page No 11

Page No 12

Page No 13

Page No 14

Page No 15

Page No 16

Page No 17

Page No 18

Page No 19

Page No 20

Page No 21

Page No 22

Page No 23

Page No 24

Page No 25

Page No 26

Page No 27

Page No 28

Page No 29

Page No 30

Page No 31

Page No 32

Page No 33

Page No 34

Page No 35

Page No 36

Page No 37

Page No 38

Page No 39

Page No 40

Page No 41

Page No 42

Page No 43

Page No 44

Page No 45

Page No 46

Page No 47

Page No 48

Page No 49

Page No 50

Page No 51

Page No 52

Page No 53

Page No 54

Page No 55

Page No 56

Page No 57

Page No 58

Page No 59

Page No 60

Page No 61

Page No 62

Page No 63

Page No 64

Page No 65

Page No 66

Page No 67

Page No 68

Page No 69

Page No 70

Page No 71

Page No 72

Page No 73

Page No 74

Page No 75

Page No 76

Page No 77

Page No 78

Page No 79

Page No 80

Page No 81

Page No 82

Page No 83

Page No 84

Page No 85

Page No 86

Bookmarks





Page No 1


Timaeus

Plato



Top




Page No 2


Table of Contents

Timaeus ................................................................................................................................................................1

Plato.........................................................................................................................................................1

INTRODUCTION AND ANALYSIS. ....................................................................................................1

TIMAEUS. .............................................................................................................................................48


Timaeus

i



Top




Page No 3


Timaeus

Plato

translated by B. Jowett

INTRODUCTION AND ANALYSIS. 

TIMAEUS.  

INTRODUCTION AND ANALYSIS.

Of all the writings of Plato the Timaeus is the most obscure and  repulsive  to the modern reader, and has

nevertheless had the greatest  influence over  the ancient and mediaeval world.  The obscurity arises  in the

infancy of  physical science, out of the confusion of  theological, mathematical, and  physiological notions, out

of the  desire to conceive the whole of nature  without any adequate knowledge  of the parts, and from a greater

perception  of similarities which lie  on the surface than of differences which are  hidden from view.  To  bring

sense under the control of reason; to find some  way through the  mist or labyrinth of appearances, either the

highway of  mathematics,  or more devious paths suggested by the analogy of man with the  world,  and of the

world with man; to see that all things have a cause and  are  tending towards an endthis is the spirit of the

ancient physical  philosopher.  He has no notion of trying an experiment and is hardly  capable of observing the

curiosities of nature which are 'tumbling out  at  his feet,' or of interpreting even the most obvious of them.  He

is  driven  back from the nearer to the more distant, from particulars to  generalities,  from the earth to the stars.

He lifts up his eyes to  the heavens and seeks  to guide by their motions his erring footsteps.  But we neither

appreciate  the conditions of knowledge to which he was  subjected, nor have the ideas  which fastened upon

his imagination the  same hold upon us.  For he is  hanging between matter and mind; he is  under the dominion

at the same time  both of sense and of abstractions;  his impressions are taken almost at  random from the

outside of nature;  he sees the light, but not the objects  which are revealed by the  light; and he brings into

juxtaposition things  which to us appear wide  as the poles asunder, because he finds nothing  between them.

He  passes abruptly from persons to ideas and numbers, and  from ideas and  numbers to persons,from the

heavens to man, from astronomy  to  physiology; he confuses, or rather does not distinguish, subject and

object, first and final causes, and is dreaming of geometrical figures  lost  in a flux of sense.  He contrasts the

perfect movements of the  heavenly  bodies with the imperfect representation of them (Rep.), and  he does not

always require strict accuracy even in applications of  number and figure  (Rep.).  His mind lingers around the

forms of  mythology, which he uses as  symbols or translates into figures of  speech.  He has no implements of

observation, such as the telescope or  microscope; the great science of  chemistry is a blank to him.  It is  only

by an effort that the modern  thinker can breathe the atmosphere  of the ancient philosopher, or  understand

how, under such unequal  conditions, he seems in many instances,  by a sort of inspiration, to  have anticipated

the truth. 

The influence with the Timaeus has exercised upon posterity is due  partly  to a misunderstanding.  In the

supposed depths of this dialogue  the Neo  Platonists found hidden meanings and connections with the  Jewish

and  Christian Scriptures, and out of them they elicited  doctrines quite at  variance with the spirit of Plato.

Timaeus 1



Top




Page No 4


Believing that  he was inspired by the  Holy Ghost, or had received his wisdom from  Moses, they seemed to

find in  his writings the Christian Trinity, the  Word, the Church, the creation of  the world in a Jewish sense, as

they  really found the personality of God or  of mind, and the immortality of  the soul.  All religions and

philosophies  met and mingled in the  schools of Alexandria, and the NeoPlatonists had a  method of

interpretation which could elicit any meaning out of any words.  They  were really incapable of distinguishing

between the opinions of one  philosopher and anotherbetween Aristotle and Plato, or between the  serious

thoughts of Plato and his passing fancies.  They were absorbed  in  his theology and were under the dominion

of his name, while that  which was  truly great and truly characteristic in him, his effort to  realize and  connect

abstractions, was not understood by them at all.  Yet the genius of  Plato and Greek philosophy reacted upon

the East,  and a Greek element of  thought and language overlaid and partly  reduced to order the chaos of

Orientalism.  And kindred spirits, like  St. Augustine, even though they  were acquainted with his writings only

through the medium of a Latin  translation, were profoundly affected by  them, seeming to find 'God and his

word everywhere insinuated' in them  (August. Confess.) 

There is no danger of the modern commentators on the Timaeus  falling into  the absurdities of the

NeoPlatonists.  In the present  day we are well  aware that an ancient philosopher is to be interpreted  from

himself and by  the contemporary history of thought.  We know that  mysticism is not  criticism.  The fancies of

the NeoPlatonists are  only interesting to us  because they exhibit a phase of the human mind  which prevailed

widely in  the first centuries of the Christian era,  and is not wholly extinct in our  own day.  But they have

nothing to do  with the interpretation of Plato, and  in spirit they are opposed to  him.  They are the feeble

expression of an  age which has lost the  power not only of creating great works, but of  understanding them.

They are the spurious birth of a marriage between  philosophy and  tradition, between Hellas and the

East(Greek) (Rep.).  Whereas the  socalled mysticism of Plato is purely Greek, arising out of  his  imperfect

knowledge and high aspirations, and is the growth of an age  in which philosophy is not wholly separated

from poetry and mythology. 

A greater danger with modern interpreters of Plato is the tendency  to  regard the Timaeus as the centre of his

system.  We do not know how  Plato  would have arranged his own dialogues, or whether the thought of

arranging  any of them, besides the two 'Trilogies' which he has  expressly connected;  was ever present to his

mind.  But, if he had  arranged them, there are many  indications that this is not the place  which he would have

assigned to the  Timaeus.  We observe, first of  all, that the dialogue is put into the mouth  of a Pythagorean

philosopher, and not of Socrates.  And this is required by  dramatic  propriety; for the investigation of nature

was expressly renounced  by  Socrates in the Phaedo.  Nor does Plato himself attribute any  importance  to his

guesses at science.  He is not at all absorbed by  them, as he is by  the IDEA of good.  He is modest and

hesitating, and  confesses that his  words partake of the uncertainty of the subject  (Tim.).  The dialogue is

primarily concerned with the animal creation,  including under this term the  heavenly bodies, and with man

only as  one among the animals.  But we can  hardly suppose that Plato would  have preferred the study of

nature to man,  or that he would have  deemed the formation of the world and the human frame  to have the

same  interest which he ascribes to the mystery of being and  notbeing, or  to the great political problems

which he discusses in the  Republic and  the Laws.  There are no speculations on physics in the other  dialogues

of Plato, and he himself regards the consideration of them as a  rational pastime only.  He is beginning to feel

the need of further  divisions of knowledge; and is becoming aware that besides dialectic,  mathematics, and

the arts, there is another field which has been  hitherto  unexplored by him.  But he has not as yet defined this

intermediate  territory which lies somewhere between medicine and  mathematics, and he  would have felt that

there was as great an impiety  in ranking theories  of physics first in the order of knowledge, as in  placing the

body  before the soul. 

It is true, however, that the Timaeus is by no means confined to  speculations on physics.  The deeper

foundations of the Platonic  philosophy, such as the nature of God, the distinction of the sensible  and

intellectual, the great original conceptions of time and space,  also appear  in it.  They are found principally in

the first half of  the dialogue.  The  construction of the heavens is for the most part  ideal; the cyclic year  serves


Timaeus

Timaeus 2



Top




Page No 5


as the connection between the world of  absolute being and of  generation, just as the number of population in

the Republic is the  expression or symbol of the transition from the  ideal to the actual state.  In some passages

we are uncertain whether  we are reading a description of  astronomical facts or contemplating  processes of the

human mind, or of that  divine mind (Phil.) which in  Plato is hardly separable from it.  The  characteristics of

man are  transferred to the worldanimal, as for example  when intelligence and  knowledge are said to be

perfected by the circle of  the Same, and true  opinion by the circle of the Other; and conversely the  motions of

the  worldanimal reappear in man; its amorphous state continues  in the  child, and in both disorder and chaos

are gradually succeeded by  stability and order.  It is not however to passages like these that  Plato  is referring

when he speaks of the uncertainty of his subject,  but rather  to the composition of bodies, to the relations of

colours,  the nature of  diseases, and the like, about which he truly feels the  lamentable ignorance  prevailing in

his own age. 

We are led by Plato himself to regard the Timaeus, not as the  centre or  inmost shrine of the edifice, but as a

detached building in  a different  style, framed, not after the Socratic, but after some  Pythagorean model.  As in

the Cratylus and Parmenides, we are uncertain  whether Plato is  expressing his own opinions, or appropriating

and  perhaps improving the  philosophical speculations of others.  In all  three dialogues he is  exerting his

dramatic and imitative power; in  the Cratylus mingling a  satirical and humorous purpose with true  principles

of language; in the  Parmenides overthrowing Megarianism by  a sort of ultraMegarianism, which  discovers

contradictions in the one  as great as those which have been  previously shown to exist in the  ideas.  There is a

similar uncertainty  about the Timaeus; in the first  part he scales the heights of  transcendentalism, in the latter

part he  treats in a bald and superficial  manner of the functions and diseases  of the human frame.  He uses the

thoughts and almost the words of  Parmenides when he discourses of being and  of essence, adopting from  old

religion into philosophy the conception of  God, and from the  Megarians the IDEA of good.  He agrees with

Empedocles  and the  Atomists in attributing the greater differences of kinds to the  figures of the elements and

their movements into and out of one  another.  With Heracleitus, he acknowledges the perpetual flux; like

Anaxagoras,  he asserts the predominance of mind, although admitting an  element of  necessity which reason

is incapable of subduing; like the  Pythagoreans he  supposes the mystery of the world to be contained in

number.  Many, if not  all the elements of the PreSocratic philosophy  are included in the  Timaeus.  It is a

composite or eclectic work of  imagination, in which  Plato, without naming them, gathers up into a  kind of

system the various  elements of philosophy which preceded him. 

If we allow for the difference of subject, and for some growth in  Plato's  own mind, the discrepancy between

the Timaeus and the other  dialogues will  not appear to be great.  It is probable that the  relation of the ideas to

God or of God to the world was differently  conceived by him at different  times of his life.  In all his later

dialogues we observe a tendency in him  to personify mind or God, and  he therefore naturally inclines to view

creation as the work of  design.  The creator is like a human artist who  frames in his mind a  plan which he

executes by the help of his servants.  Thus the language  of philosophy which speaks of first and second causes

is  crossed by  another sort of phraseology:  'God made the world because he was  good,  and the demons

ministered to him.'  The Timaeus is cast in a more  theological and less philosophical mould than the other

dialogues, but  the  same general spirit is apparent; there is the same dualism or  opposition  between the ideal

and actualthe soul is prior to the  body, the  intelligible and unseen to the visible and corporeal.  There  is the

same  distinction between knowledge and opinion which occurs in  the Theaetetus  and Republic, the same

enmity to the poets, the same  combination of music  and gymnastics.  The doctrine of transmigration  is still

held by him, as in  the Phaedrus and Republic; and the soul  has a view of the heavens in a  prior state of being.

The ideas also  remain, but they have become types in  nature, forms of men, animals,  birds, fishes.  And the

attribution of evil  to physical causes accords  with the doctrine which he maintains in the Laws  respecting the

involuntariness of vice. 

The style and plan of the Timaeus differ greatly from that of any  other of  the Platonic dialogues.  The

language is weighty, abrupt, and  in some  passages sublime.  But Plato has not the same mastery over his

instrument  which he exhibits in the Phaedrus or Symposium.  Nothing  can exceed the  beauty or art of the


Timaeus

Timaeus 3



Top




Page No 6


introduction, in which he is using  words after his  accustomed manner.  But in the rest of the work the  power

of language seems  to fail him, and the dramatic form is wholly  given up.  He could write in  one style, but not

in another, and the  Greek language had not as yet been  fashioned by any poet or  philosopher to describe

physical phenomena.  The  early physiologists  had generally written in verse; the prose writers, like

Democritus and  Anaxagoras, as far as we can judge from their fragments,  never  attained to a periodic style.

And hence we find the same sort of  clumsiness in the Timaeus of Plato which characterizes the  philosophical

poem of Lucretius.  There is a want of flow and often a  defect of rhythm;  the meaning is sometimes obscure,

and there is a  greater use of apposition  and more of repetition than occurs in  Plato's earlier writings.  The

sentences are less closely connected and  also more involved; the  antecedents of demonstrative and relative

pronouns are in some cases remote  and perplexing.  The greater  frequency of participles and of absolute

constructions gives the  effect of heaviness.  The descriptive portion of  the Timaeus retains  traces of the first

Greek prose composition; for the  great master of  language was speaking on a theme with which he was

imperfectly  acquainted, and had no words in which to express his meaning.  The  rugged grandeur of the

opening discourse of Timaeus may be compared  with the more harmonious beauty of a similar passage in the

Phaedrus. 

To the same cause we may attribute the want of plan.  Plato had not  the  command of his materials which

would have enabled him to produce a  perfect  work of art.  Hence there are several new beginnings and

resumptions and  formal or artificial connections; we miss the 'callida  junctura' of the  earlier dialogues.  His

speculations about the  Eternal, his theories of  creation, his mathematical anticipations, are  supplemented by

desultory  remarks on the one immortal and the two  mortal souls of man, on the  functions of the bodily organs

in health  and disease, on sight, hearing,  smell, taste, and touch.  He soars  into the heavens, and then, as if his

wings were suddenly clipped, he  walks ungracefully and with difficulty upon  the earth.  The greatest  things in

the world, and the least things in man,  are brought within  the compass of a short treatise.  But the intermediate

links are  missing, and we cannot be surprised that there should be a want  of  unity in a work which embraces

astronomy, theology, physiology, and  natural philosophy in a few pages. 

It is not easy to determine how Plato's cosmos may be presented to  the  reader in a clearer and shorter form; or

how we may supply a  thread of  connexion to his ideas without giving greater consistency to  them than they

possessed in his mind, or adding on consequences which  would never have  occurred to him.  For he has

glimpses of the truth,  but no comprehensive or  perfect vision.  There are isolated  expressions about the nature

of God  which have a wonderful depth and  power; but we are not justified in  assuming that these had any

greater  significance to the mind of Plato than  language of a neutral and  impersonal character . . . With a view

to the  illustration of the  Timaeus I propose to divide this Introduction into  sections, of which  the first will

contain an outline of the dialogue:  (2) I shall  consider the aspects of nature which presented themselves to

Plato and  his age, and the elements of philosophy which entered into the  conception of them:  (3) the theology

and physics of the Timaeus,  including  the soul of the world, the conception of time and space, and  the

composition of the elements:  (4) in the fourth section I shall  consider  the Platonic astronomy, and the position

of the earth.  There  will remain,  (5) the psychology, (6) the physiology of Plato, and (7)  his analysis  of the

senses to be briefly commented upon:  (8) lastly,  we may examine  in what points Plato approaches or

anticipates the  discoveries of  modern science. 

Section 1. 

Socrates begins the Timaeus with a summary of the Republic.  He  lightly  touches upon a few points,the

division of labour and  distribution of the  citizens into classes, the double nature and  training of the guardians,

the  community of property and of women and  children.  But he makes no mention  of the second education, or

of the  government of philosophers. 

And now he desires to see the ideal State set in motion; he would  like to  know how she behaved in some

great struggle.  But he is unable  to invent  such a narrative himself; and he is afraid that the poets  are equally


Timaeus

Timaeus 4



Top




Page No 7


incapable; for, although he pretends to have nothing to  say against them,  he remarks that they are a tribe of

imitators, who  can only describe what  they have seen.  And he fears that the  Sophists, who are plentifully

supplied with graces of speech, in their  erratic way of life having never  had a city or house of their own, may

through want of experience err in  their conception of philosophers and  statesmen.  'And therefore to you I

turn, Timaeus, citizen of Locris,  who are at once a philosopher and a  statesman, and to you, Critias,  whom all

Athenians know to be similarly  accomplished, and to  Hermocrates, who is also fitted by nature and  education

to share in  our discourse.' 

HERMOCRATES: 'We will do our best, and have been already  preparing;  for on our way home, Critias told

us of an ancient  tradition,  which I wish, Critias, that you would repeat to Socrates.'  'I will, if Timaeus

approves.'  'I approve.'  Listen then,  Socrates,  to a tale of Solon's, who, being the friend of Dropidas my

greatgrandfather, told it to my grandfather Critias, and he told me.  The narrative related to ancient famous

actions of the Athenian  people, and to  one especially, which I will rehearse in honour of you  and of the

goddess.  Critias when he told this tale of the olden time,  was ninety years old, I  being not more than ten.  The

occasion of the  rehearsal was the day of the  Apaturia called the Registration of  Youth, at which our parents

gave prizes  for recitation.  Some poems of  Solon were recited by the boys.  They had  not at that time gone out

of  fashion, and the recital of them led some one  to say, perhaps in  compliment to Critias, that Solon was not

only the  wisest of men but  also the best of poets.  The old man brightened up at  hearing this,  and said:  Had

Solon only had the leisure which was required  to  complete the famous legend which he brought with him

from Egypt he  would  have been as distinguished as Homer and Hesiod.  'And what was  the subject  of the

poem?' said the person who made the remark.  The  subject was a very  noble one; he described the most

famous action in  which the Athenian people  were ever engaged.  But the memory of their  exploits has passed

away owing  to the lapse of time and the extinction  of the actors.  'Tell us,' said the  other, 'the whole story, and

where  Solon heard the story.'  He replied  There is at the head of the  Egyptian Delta, where the river Nile

divides, a  city and district  called Sais; the city was the birthplace of King Amasis,  and is under  the protection

of the goddess Neith or Athene.  The citizens  have a  friendly feeling towards the Athenians, believing

themselves to be  related to them.  Hither came Solon, and was received with honour; and  here  he first learnt,

by conversing with the Egyptian priests, how  ignorant he  and his countrymen were of antiquity.  Perceiving

this,  and with the view  of eliciting information from them, he told them the  tales of Phoroneus and  Niobe,

and also of Deucalion and Pyrrha, and he  endeavoured to count the  generations which had since passed.

Thereupon an aged priest said to him:  'O Solon, Solon, you Hellenes  are ever young, and there is no old man

who  is a Hellene.'  'What do  you mean?' he asked.  'In mind,' replied the  priest, 'I mean to say  that you are

children; there is no opinion or  tradition of knowledge  among you which is white with age; and I will tell  you

why.  Like the  rest of mankind you have suffered from convulsions of  nature, which  are chiefly brought about

by the two great agencies of fire  and water.  The former is symbolized in the Hellenic tale of young Phaethon

who  drove his father's horses the wrong way, and having burnt up the earth  was himself burnt up by a

thunderbolt.  For there occurs at long  intervals  a derangement of the heavenly bodies, and then the earth is

destroyed by  fire.  At such times, and when fire is the agent, those  who dwell by rivers  or on the seashore are

safer than those who dwell  upon high and dry places,  who in their turn are safer when the danger  is from

water.  Now the Nile is  our saviour from fire, and as there is  little rain in Egypt, we are not  harmed by water;

whereas in other  countries, when a deluge comes, the  inhabitants are swept by the  rivers into the sea.  The

memorials which your  own and other nations  have once had of the famous actions of mankind perish  in the

waters at  certain periods; and the rude survivors in the mountains  begin again,  knowing nothing of the world

before the flood.  But in Egypt  the  traditions of our own and other lands are by us registered for ever in  our

temples.  The genealogies which you have recited to us out of your  own  annals, Solon, are a mere children's

story.  For in the first  place, you  remember one deluge only, and there were many of them, and  you know

nothing  of that fairest and noblest race of which you are a  seed or remnant.  The  memory of them was lost,

because there was no  written voice among you.  For  in the times before the great flood  Athens was the

greatest and best of  cities and did the noblest deeds  and had the best constitution of any under  the face of

heaven.'  Solon  marvelled, and desired to be informed of the  particulars.  'You are  welcome to hear them,' said

the priest, 'both for  your own sake and  for that of the city, and above all for the sake of the  goddess who is  the


Timaeus

Timaeus 5



Top




Page No 8


common foundress of both our cities.  Nine thousand  years have  elapsed since she founded yours, and eight

thousand since she  founded  ours, as our annals record.  Many laws exist among us which are the  counterpart

of yours as they were in the olden time. I will briefly  describe them to you, and you shall read the account of

them at your  leisure in the sacred registers.  In the first place, there was a  caste of  priests among the ancient

Athenians, and another of artisans;  also castes  of shepherds, hunters, and husbandmen, and lastly of  warriors,

who, like  the warriors of Egypt, were separated from the  rest, and carried shields  and spears, a custom which

the goddess first  taught you, and then the  Asiatics, and we among Asiatics first  received from her.  Observe

again,  what care the law took in the  pursuit of wisdom, searching out the deep  things of the world, and

applying them to the use of man.  The spot of  earth which the goddess  chose had the best of climates, and

produced the  wisest men; in no  other was she herself, the philosopher and warrior  goddess, so likely  to have

votaries.  And there you dwelt as became the  children of the  gods, excelling all men in virtue, and many

famous actions  are  recorded of you.  The most famous of them all was the overthrow of the  island of Atlantis.

This great island lay over against the Pillars of  Heracles, in extent greater than Libya and Asia put together,

and was  the  passage to other islands and to a great ocean of which the  Mediterranean  sea was only the

harbour; and within the Pillars the  empire of Atlantis  reached in Europe to Tyrrhenia and in Libya to  Egypt.

This mighty power  was arrayed against Egypt and Hellas and all  the countries bordering on the

Mediterranean.  Then your city did  bravely, and won renown over the whole  earth.  For at the peril of her  own

existence, and when the other Hellenes  had deserted her, she  repelled the invader, and of her own accord gave

liberty to all the  nations within the Pillars.  A little while afterwards  there were  great earthquakes and floods,

and your warrior race all sank  into the  earth; and the great island of Atlantis also disappeared in the  sea.  This

is the explanation of the shallows which are found in that part  of the Atlantic ocean.' 

Such was the tale, Socrates, which Critias heard from Solon; and I  noticed  when listening to you yesterday,

how close the resemblance was  between your  city and citizens and the ancient Athenian State.  But I  would

not speak at  the time, because I wanted to refresh my memory.  I  had heard the old man  when I was a child,

and though I could not  remember the whole of our  yesterday's discourse, I was able to recall  every word of

this, which is  branded into my mind; and I am prepared,  Socrates, to rehearse to you the  entire narrative.  The

imaginary  State which you were describing may be  identified with the reality of  Solon, and our antediluvian

ancestors may be  your citizens.  'That is  excellent, Critias, and very appropriate to a  Panathenaic festival;  the

truth of the story is a great advantage.'  Then  now let me explain  to you the order of our entertainment; first,

Timaeus,  who is a  natural philosopher, will speak of the origin of the world, going  down  to the creation of

man, and then I shall receive the men whom he has  created, and some of whom will have been educated by

you, and  introduce  them to you as the lost Athenian citizens of whom the  Egyptian record  spoke.  As the law

of Solon prescribes, we will bring  them into court and  acknowledge their claims to citizenship.  'I see,'  replied

Socrates, 'that  I shall be well entertained; and do you,  Timaeus, offer up a prayer and  begin.' 

TIMAEUS: All men who have any right feeling, at the  beginning of any  enterprise, call upon the Gods; and

he who is about  to speak of the origin  of the universe has a special need of their  aid.  May my words be

acceptable to them, and may I speak in the  manner which will be most  intelligible to you and will best

express my  own meaning! 

First, I must distinguish between that which always is and never  becomes  and which is apprehended by

reason and reflection, and that  which always  becomes and never is and is conceived by opinion with the  help

of sense.  All that becomes and is created is the work of a cause,  and that is fair  which the artificer makes after

an eternal pattern,  but whatever is  fashioned after a created pattern is not fair.  Is the  world created or

uncreated?that is the first question.  Created, I  reply, being visible  and tangible and having a body, and

therefore  sensible; and if sensible,  then created; and if created, made by a  cause, and the cause is the  ineffable

father of all things, who had  before him an eternal archetype.  For to imagine that the archetype was  created

would be blasphemy, seeing  that the world is the noblest of  creations, and God is the best of causes.  And the

world being thus  created according to the eternal pattern is the  copy of something; and  we may assume that

words are akin to the matter of  which they speak.  What is spoken of the unchanging or intelligible must be


Timaeus

Timaeus 6



Top




Page No 9


certain and  true; but what is spoken of the created image can only be  probable;  being is to becoming what

truth is to belief.  And amid the  variety of  opinions which have arisen about God and the nature of the world

we  must be content to take probability for our rule, considering that I,  who am the speaker, and you, who are

the judges, are only men; to  probability we may attain but no further. 

SOCRATES: Excellent, Timaeus, I like your manner of  approaching the  subjectproceed. 

TIMAEUS: Why did the Creator make the world?...He was good,  and therefore  not jealous, and being free

from jealousy he desired  that all things should  be like himself.  Wherefore he set in order the  visible world,

which he  found in disorder.  Now he who is the best  could only create the fairest;  and reflecting that of visible

things  the intelligent is superior to the  unintelligent, he put intelligence  in soul and soul in body, and framed

the  universe to be the best and  fairest work in the order of nature, and the  world became a living  soul through

the providence of God. 

In the likeness of what animal was the world made?that is the  third  question...The form of the perfect

animal was a whole, and  contained all  intelligible beings, and the visible animal, made after  the pattern of

this, included all visible creatures. 

Are there many worlds or one only?that is the fourth  question...One only.  For if in the original there had

been more than  one they would have been  the parts of a third, which would have been  the true pattern of the

world;  and therefore there is, and will ever  be, but one created world.  Now that  which is created is of

necessity  corporeal and visible and tangible,  visible and therefore made of  fire,tangible and therefore

solid and made  of earth.  But two terms  must be united by a third, which is a mean between  them; and had the

earth been a surface only, one mean would have sufficed,  but two means  are required to unite solid bodies.

And as the world was  composed of  solids, between the elements of fire and earth God placed two  other

elements of air and water, and arranged them in a continuous  proportion 

fire:air::air:water, and air:water::water:earth, 

and so put together a visible and palpable heaven, having harmony  and  friendship in the union of the four

elements; and being at unity  with  itself it was indissoluble except by the hand of the framer.  Each of the

elements was taken into the universe whole and entire;  for he considered  that the animal should be perfect

and one, leaving  no remnants out of which  another animal could be created, and should  also be free from old

age and  disease, which are produced by the  action of external forces.  And as he  was to contain all things, he

was made in the allcontaining form of a  sphere, round as from a lathe  and every way equidistant from the

centre, as  was natural and suitable  to him.  He was finished and smooth, having  neither eyes nor ears, for  there

was nothing without him which he could see  or hear; and he had  no need to carry food to his mouth, nor was

there air  for him to  breathe; and he did not require hands, for there was nothing of  which  he could take hold,

nor feet, with which to walk.  All that he did  was  done rationally in and by himself, and he moved in a circle

turning  within himself, which is the most intellectual of motions; but the  other  six motions were wanting to

him; wherefore the universe had no  feet or  legs. 

And so the thought of God made a God in the image of a perfect  body, having  intercourse with himself and

needing no other, but in  every part harmonious  and selfcontained and truly blessed.  The soul  was first made

by himthe  elder to rule the younger; not in the order  in which our wayward fancy has  led us to describe

them, but the soul  first and afterwards the body.  God  took of the unchangeable and  indivisible and also of the

divisible and  corporeal, and out of the  two he made a third nature, essence, which was in  a mean between

them,  and partook of the same and the other, the intractable  nature of the  other being compressed into the

same.  Having made a compound  of all  the three, he proceeded to divide the entire mass into portions  related

to one another in the ratios of 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 8, 27, and  proceeded  to fill up the double and triple intervals

thus 


Timaeus

Timaeus 7



Top




Page No 10


over 1, 4/3, 3/2,  over 2, 8/3, 3,  over 4, 16/3, 6,   over 8:   over 1, 3/2, 2,   over 3, 9/2, 6,  over 9,

27/2, 18,  over 27; 

in which double series of numbers are two kinds of means; the one  exceeds  and is exceeded by equal parts of

the extremes, e.g. 1, 4/3,  2; the other  kind of mean is one which is equidistant from the  extremes2, 4, 6.  In

this manner there were formed intervals of  thirds, 3:2, of fourths, 4:3,  and of ninths, 9:8.  And next he filled

up the intervals of a fourth with  ninths, leaving a remnant which is  in the ratio of 256:243.  The entire

compound was divided by him  lengthways into two parts, which he united at  the centre like the  letter X, and

bent into an inner and outer circle or  sphere, cutting  one another again at a point over against the point at

which they  cross.  The outer circle or sphere was named the sphere of the  samethe inner, the sphere of the

other or diverse; and the one  revolved  horizontally to the right, the other diagonally to the left.  To the sphere

of the same which was undivided he gave dominion, but  the sphere of the  other or diverse was distributed

into seven unequal  orbits, having  intervals in ratios of twos and threes, three of either  sort, and he bade  the

orbits move in opposite directions to one  anotherthree of them, the  Sun, Mercury, Venus, with equal

swiftness,  and the remaining fourthe  Moon, Saturn, Mars, Jupiter, with unequal  swiftness to the three and

to one  another, but all in due proportion. 

When the Creator had made the soul he made the body within her; and  the  soul interfused everywhere from

the centre to the circumference of  heaven,  herself turning in herself, began a divine life of rational  and

everlasting  motion.  The body of heaven is visible, but the soul  is invisible, and  partakes of reason and

harmony, and is the best of  creations, being the  work of the best.  And being composed of the  same, the other,

and the  essence, these three, and also divided and  bound in harmonical proportion,  and revolving within

herselfthe soul  when touching anything which has  essence, whether divided or  undivided, is stirred to utter

the sameness or  diversity of that and  some other thing, and to tell how and when and where  individuals are

affected or related, whether in the world of change or of  essence.  When reason is in the neighbourhood of

sense, and the circle of  the  other or diverse is moving truly, then arise true opinions and beliefs;  when reason

is in the sphere of thought, and the circle of the same  runs  smoothly, then intelligence is perfected. 

When the Father who begat the world saw the image which he had made  of the  Eternal Gods moving and

living, he rejoiced; and in his joy  resolved, since  the archetype was eternal, to make the creature  eternal as far

as this was  possible.  Wherefore he made an image of  eternity which is time, having an  uniform motion

according to number,  parted into months and days and years,  and also having greater  divisions of past,

present, and future.  These all  apply to becoming  in time, and have no meaning in relation to the eternal

nature, which  ever is and never was or will be; for the unchangeable is  never older  or younger, and when we

say that he 'was' or 'will be,' we are  mistaken, for these words are applicable only to becoming, and not to  true

being; and equally wrong are we in saying that what has become IS  become  and that what becomes IS

becoming, and that the nonexistent IS  non  existent...These are the forms of time which imitate eternity and

move in a  circle measured by number. 

Thus was time made in the image of the eternal nature; and it was  created  together with the heavens, in order

that if they were  dissolved, it might  perish with them.  And God made the sun and moon  and five other

wanderers,  as they are called, seven in all, and to  each of them he gave a body moving  in an orbit, being one

of the seven  orbits into which the circle of the  other was divided.  He put the  moon in the orbit which was

nearest to the  earth, the sun in that  next, the morning star and Mercury in the orbits  which move opposite  to

the sun but with equal swiftnessthis being the  reason why they  overtake and are overtaken by one another.

All these  bodies became  living creatures, and learnt their appointed tasks, and began  to move,  the nearer

more swiftly, the remoter more slowly, according to the  diagonal movement of the other.  And since this was

controlled by the  movement of the same, the seven planets in their courses appeared to  describe spirals; and

that appeared fastest which was slowest, and  that  which overtook others appeared to be overtaken by them.

And God  lighted a  fire in the second orbit from the earth which is called the  sun, to give  light over the whole

heaven, and to teach intelligent  beings that knowledge  of number which is derived from the revolution  of the


Timaeus

Timaeus 8



Top




Page No 11


same.  Thus arose day  and night, which are the periods of the  most intelligent nature; a month is  created by

the revolution of the  moon, a year by that of the sun.  Other  periods of wonderful length  and complexity are

not observed by men in  general; there is moreover a  cycle or perfect year at the completion of  which they all

meet and  coincide...To this end the stars came into being,  that the created  heaven might imitate the eternal

nature. 

Thus far the universal animal was made in the divine image, but the  other  animals were not as yet included in

him.  And God created them  according to  the patterns or species of them which existed in the  divine original.

There are four of them:  one of gods, another of  birds, a third of fishes,  and a fourth of animals.  The gods were

made  in the form of a circle, which  is the most perfect figure and the  figure of the universe.  They were

created chiefly of fire, that they  might be bright, and were made to know  and follow the best, and to be

scattered over the heavens, of which they  were to be the glory.  Two  kinds of motion were assigned to

themfirst,  the revolution in the  same and around the same, in peaceful unchanging  thought of the same;

and to this was added a forward motion which was under  the control of  the same.  Thus then the fixed stars

were created, being  divine and  eternal animals, revolving on the same spot, and the wandering  stars,  in their

courses, were created in the manner already described.  The  earth, which is our nurse, clinging around the pole

extended through  the  universe, he made to be the guardian and artificer of night and  day, first  and eldest of

gods that are in the interior of heaven.  Vain would be the  labour of telling all the figures of them, moving  as

in dance, and their  juxtapositions and approximations, and when  and where and behind what  other stars they

appear to disappearto  tell of all this without looking  at a plan of them would be labour in  vain. 

The knowledge of the other gods is beyond us, and we can only  accept the  traditions of the ancients, who

were the children of the  gods, as they  said; for surely they must have known their own  ancestors.  Although

they  give no proof, we must believe them as is  customary.  They tell us that  Oceanus and Tethys were the

children of  Earth and Heaven; that Phoreys,  Cronos, and Rhea came in the next  generation, and were

followed by Zeus and  Here, whose brothers and  children are known to everybody. 

When all of them, both those who show themselves in the sky, and  those who  retire from view, had come into

being, the Creator addressed  them thus:  'Gods, sons of gods, my works, if I will, are  indissoluble.  That

which is  bound may be dissolved, but only an evil  being would dissolve that which is  harmonious and happy.

And although  you are not immortal you shall not die,  for I will hold you together.  Hear me, then:Three

tribes of mortal  beings have still to be  created, but if created by me they would be like  gods.  Do ye  therefore

make them; I will implant in them the seed of  immortality,  and you shall weave together the mortal and

immortal, and  provide food  for them, and receive them again in death.'  Thus he spake,  and poured  the

remains of the elements into the cup in which he had mingled  the  soul of the universe.  They were no longer

pure as before, but diluted;  and the mixture he distributed into souls equal in number to the  stars, and

assigned each to a starthen having mounted them, as in a  chariot, he  showed them the nature of the

universe, and told them of  their future birth  and human lot.  They were to be sown in the  planets, and out of

them was to  come forth the most religious of  animals, which would hereafter be called  man.  The souls were

to be  implanted in bodies, which were in a perpetual  flux, whence, he said,  would arise, first, sensation;

secondly, love, which  is a mixture of  pleasure and pain; thirdly, fear and anger, and the  opposite  affections:

and if they conquered these, they would live  righteously,  but if they were conquered by them, unrighteously.

He who  lived well  would return to his native star, and would there have a blessed  existence; but, if he lived

ill, he would pass into the nature of a  woman,  and if he did not then alter his evil ways, into the likeness  of

some  animal, until the reason which was in him reasserted her sway  over the  elements of fire, air, earth,

water, which had engrossed her,  and he  regained his first and better nature.  Having given this law to  his

creatures, that he might be guiltless of their future evil, he  sowed them,  some in the earth, some in the moon,

and some in the other  planets; and he  ordered the younger gods to frame human bodies for  them and to make

the  necessary additions to them, and to avert from  them all but selfinflicted  evil. 


Timaeus

Timaeus 9



Top




Page No 12


Having given these commands, the Creator remained in his own  nature.  And  his children, receiving from him

the immortal principle,  borrowed from the  world portions of earth, air, fire, water, hereafter  to be returned,

which  they fastened together, not with the adamantine  bonds which bound  themselves, but by little invisible

pegs, making  each separate body out of  all the elements, subject to influx and  efflux, and containing the

courses  of the soul.  These swelling and  surging as in a river moved irregularly  and irrationally in all the  six

possible ways, forwards, backwards, right,  left, up and down.  But  violent as were the internal and alimentary

fluids,  the tide became  still more violent when the body came into contact with  flaming fire,  or the solid

earth, or gliding waters, or the stormy wind;  the motions  produced by these impulses pass through the body to

the soul  and have  the name of sensations.  Uniting with the everflowing current,  they  shake the courses of

the soul, stopping the revolution of the same and  twisting in all sorts of ways the nature of the other, and the

harmonical  ratios of twos and threes and the mean terms which connect  them, until the  circles are bent and

disordered and their motion  becomes irregular.  You  may imagine a position of the body in which  the head is

resting upon the  ground, and the legs are in the air, and  the top is bottom and the left  right.  And something

similar happens  when the disordered motions of the  soul come into contact with any  external thing; they say

the same or the  other in a manner which is  the very opposite of the truth, and they are  false and foolish, and

have no guiding principle in them.  And when  external impressions  enter in, they are really conquered, though

they seem  to conquer. 

By reason of these affections the soul is at first without  intelligence,  but as time goes on the stream of

nutriment abates, and  the courses of the  soul regain their proper motion, and apprehend the  same and the

other  rightly, and become rational.  The soul of him who  has education is whole  and perfect and escapes the

worst disease, but,  if a man's education be  neglected, he walks lamely through life and  returns good for

nothing to the  world below.  This, however, is an  afterstageat present, we are only  concerned with the

creation of  the body and soul. 

The two divine courses were encased by the gods in a sphere which  is called  the head, and is the god and lord

of us.  And to this they  gave the body to  be a vehicle, and the members to be instruments,  having the power of

flexion and extension.  Such was the origin of  legs and arms.  In the next  place, the gods gave a forward

motion to  the human body, because the front  part of man was the more honourable  and had authority.  And

they put in a  face in which they inserted  organs to minister in all things to the  providence of the soul.  They

first contrived the eyes, into which they  conveyed a light akin to the  light of day, making it flow through the

pupils.  When the light of  the eye is surrounded by the light of day, then  like falls upon like,  and they unite

and form one body which conveys to the  soul the motions  of visible objects.  But when the visual ray goes

forth  into the  darkness, then unlike falls upon unlikethe eye no longer sees,  and  we go to sleep.  The fire or

light, when kept in by the eyelids,  equalizes the inward motions, and there is rest accompanied by few

dreams;  only when the greater motions remain they engender in us  corresponding  visions of the night.  And

now we shall be able to  understand the nature of  reflections in mirrors.  The fires from  within and from

without meet about  the smooth and bright surface of  the mirror; and because they meet in a  manner contrary

to the usual  mode, the right and left sides of the object  are transposed.  In a  concave mirror the top and bottom

are inverted, but  this is no  transposition. 

These are the second causes which God used as his ministers in  fashioning  the world.  They are thought by

many to be the prime  causes, but they are  not so; for they are destitute of mind and  reason, and the lover of

mind  will not allow that there are any prime  causes other than the rational and  invisible onesthese he

investigates first, and afterwards the causes of  things which are  moved by others, and which work by chance

and without  order.  Of the  second or concurrent causes of sight I have already spoken,  and I will  now speak of

the higher purpose of God in giving us eyes.  Sight  is  the source of the greatest benefits to us; for if our eyes

had never  seen the sun, stars, and heavens, the words which we have spoken would  not  have been uttered.

The sight of them and their revolutions has  given us  the knowledge of number and time, the power of

enquiry, and  philosophy,  which is the great blessing of human life; not to speak of  the lesser  benefits which

even the vulgar can appreciate.  God gave us  the faculty of  sight that we might behold the order of the heavens


Timaeus

Timaeus 10



Top




Page No 13


and  create a  corresponding order in our own erring minds.  To the like end  the gifts of  speech and hearing

were bestowed upon us; not for the  sake of irrational  pleasure, but in order that we might harmonize the

courses of the soul by  sympathy with the harmony of sound, and cure  ourselves of our irregular and  graceless

ways. 

Thus far we have spoken of the works of mind; and there are other  works  done from necessity, which we

must now place beside them; for  the creation  is made up of both, mind persuading necessity as far as  possible

to work  out good.  Before the heavens there existed fire,  air, water, earth, which  we suppose men to know,

though no one has  explained their nature, and we  erroneously maintain them to be the  letters or elements of

the whole,  although they cannot reasonably be  compared even to syllables or first  compounds.  I am not now

speaking  of the first principles of things,  because I cannot discover them by  our present mode of enquiry.  But

as I  observed the rule of  probability at first, I will begin anew, seeking by  the grace of God  to observe it still. 

In our former discussion I distinguished two kinds of beingthe  unchanging  or invisible, and the visible or

changing.  But now a third  kind is  required, which I shall call the receptacle or nurse of  generation.  There  is a

difficulty in arriving at an exact notion of  this third kind, because  the four elements themselves are of inexact

natures and easily pass into  one another, and are too transient to be  detained by any one name;  wherefore we

are compelled to speak of water  or fire, not as substances,  but as qualities.  They may be compared to  images

made of gold, which are  continually assuming new forms.  Somebody asks what they are; if you do not  know,

the safest answer is  to reply that they are gold.  In like manner  there is a universal  nature out of which all

things are made, and which is  like none of  them; but they enter into and pass out of her, and are made  after

patterns of the true in a wonderful and inexplicable manner.  The  containing principle may be likened to a

mother, the source or spring  to a  father, the intermediate nature to a child; and we may also  remark that the

matter which receives every variety of form must be  formless, like the  inodorous liquids which are prepared

to receive  scents, or the smooth and  soft materials on which figures are  impressed.  In the same way space or

matter is neither earth nor fire  nor air nor water, but an invisible and  formless being which receives  all things,

and in an incomprehensible manner  partakes of the  intelligible.  But we may say, speaking generally, that  fire

is that  part of this nature which is inflamed, water that which is  moistened,  and the like. 

Let me ask a question in which a great principle is involved:  Is  there an  essence of fire and the other

elements, or are there only  fires visible to  sense?  I answer in a word:  If mind is one thing and  true opinion

another,  then there are selfexistent essences; but if  mind is the same with  opinion, then the visible and

corporeal is most  real.  But they are not the  same, and they have a different origin and  nature.  The one comes

to us by  instruction, the other by persuasion,  the one is rational, the other is  irrational; the one is movable by

persuasion, the other immovable; the one  is possessed by every man,  the other by the gods and by very few

men.  And  we must acknowledge  that as there are two kinds of knowledge, so there are  two kinds of  being

corresponding to them; the one uncreated,  indestructible,  immovable, which is seen by intelligence only; the

other  created,  which is always becoming in place and vanishing out of place, and  is  apprehended by opinion

and sense.  There is also a third naturethat  of  space, which is indestructible, and is perceived by a kind of

spurious  reason without the help of sense.  This is presented to us in  a dreamy  manner, and yet is said to be

necessary, for we say that all  things must be  somewhere in space.  For they are the images of other  things and

must  therefore have a separate existence and exist in  something (i.e. in space).  But true reason assures us that

while two  things (i.e. the idea and the  image) are different they cannot inhere  in one another, so as to be one

and  two at the same time. 

To sum up:  Being and generation and space, these three, existed  before the  heavens, and the nurse or vessel

of generation, moistened  by water and  inflamed by fire, and taking the forms of air and earth,  assumed

various  shapes.  By the motion of the vessel, the elements  were divided, and like  grain winnowed by fans, the

close and heavy  particles settled in one place,  the light and airy ones in another.  At first they were without

reason and  measure, and had only certain  faint traces of themselves, until God  fashioned them by figure and

number.  In this, as in every other part of  creation, I suppose God to  have made things, as far as was possible,


Timaeus

Timaeus 11



Top




Page No 14


fair  and good, out of things  not fair and good. 

And now I will explain to you the generation of the world by a  method with  which your scientific training

will have made you  familiar.  Fire, air,  earth, and water are bodies and therefore  solids, and solids are

contained  in planes, and plane rectilinear  figures are made up of triangles.  Of  triangles there are two kinds;

one having the opposite sides equal  (isosceles), the other with  unequal sides (scalene).  These we may fairly

assume to be the  original elements of fire and the other bodies; what  principles are  prior to these God only

knows, and he of men whom God loves.  Next, we  must determine what are the four most beautiful figures

which are  unlike one another and yet sometimes capable of resolution into one  another...Of the two kinds of

triangles the equalsided has but one  form,  the unequalsided has an infinite variety of forms; and there is

none more  beautiful than that which forms the half of an equilateral  triangle.  Let  us then choose two

triangles; one, the isosceles, the  other, that form of  scalene which has the square of the longer side  three times

as great as the  square of the lesser side; and affirm  that, out of these, fire and the  other elements have been

constructed. 

I was wrong in imagining that all the four elements could be  generated into  and out of one another.  For as

they are formed, three  of them from the  triangle which has the sides unequal, the fourth from  the triangle

which  has equal sides, three can be resolved into one  another, but the fourth  cannot be resolved into them nor

they into it.  So much for their passage  into one another:  I must now speak of  their construction.  From the

triangle of which the hypotenuse is  twice the lesser side the three first  regular solids are  formedfirst, the

equilateral pyramid or tetrahedron;  secondly, the  octahedron; thirdly, the icosahedron; and from the isosceles

triangle  is formed the cube.  And there is a fifth figure (which is made  out of  twelve pentagons), the

dodecahedronthis God used as a model for  the  twelvefold division of the Zodiac. 

Let us now assign the geometrical forms to their respective  elements.  The  cube is the most stable of them

because resting on a  quadrangular plane  surface, and composed of isosceles triangles.  To  the earth then,

which is  the most stable of bodies and the most easily  modelled of them, may be  assigned the form of a cube;

and the  remaining forms to the other  elements,to fire the pyramid, to air  the octahedron, and to water the

icosahedron,according to their  degrees of lightness or heaviness or  power, or want of power, of

penetration.  The single particles of any of  the elements are not seen  by reason of their smallness; they only

become  visible when collected.  The ratios of their motions, numbers, and other  properties, are  ordered by the

God, who harmonized them as far as necessity  permitted. 

The probable conclusion is as follows:Earth, when dissolved by  the more  penetrating element of fire,

whether acting immediately or  through the  medium of air or water, is decomposed but not transformed.

Water, when  divided by fire or air, becomes one part fire, and two  parts air.  A volume  of air divided becomes

two of fire.  On the other  hand, when condensed, two  volumes of fire make a volume of air; and  two and a

half parts of air  condense into one of water.  Any element  which is fastened upon by fire is  cut by the

sharpness of the  triangles, until at length, coalescing with the  fire, it is at rest;  for similars are not affected by

similars.  When two  kinds of bodies  quarrel with one another, then the tendency to  decomposition continues

until the smaller either escapes to its kindred  element or becomes one  with its conqueror.  And this tendency

in bodies to  condense or escape  is a source of motion...Where there is motion there must  be a mover,  and

where there is a mover there must be something to move.  These  cannot exist in what is uniform, and therefore

motion is due to want  of uniformity.  But then why, when things are divided after their  kinds, do  they not

cease from motion?  The answer is, that the  circular motion of all  things compresses them, and as 'nature

abhors a  vacuum,' the finer and more  subtle particles of the lighter elements,  such as fire and air, are thrust

into the interstices of the larger,  each of them penetrating according to  their rarity, and thus all the  elements

are on their way up and down  everywhere and always into their  own places.  Hence there is a principle of

inequality, and therefore  of motion, in all time. 


Timaeus

Timaeus 12



Top




Page No 15


In the next place, we may observe that there are different kinds of  fire  (1) flame, (2) light that burns not,

(3) the red heat of the  embers of  fire.  And there are varieties of air, as for example, the  pure aether, the

opaque mist, and other nameless forms.  Water, again,  is of two kinds,  liquid and fusile.  The liquid is

composed of small  and unequal particles,  the fusile of large and uniform particles and  is more solid, but

nevertheless melts at the approach of fire, and  then spreads upon the  earth.  When the substance cools, the fire

passes into the air, which is  displaced, and forces together and  condenses the liquid mass.  This process  is

called cooling and  congealment.  Of the fusile kinds the fairest and  heaviest is gold;  this is hardened by

filtration through rock, and is of a  bright yellow  colour.  A shoot of gold which is darker and denser than the

rest is  called adamant.  Another kind is called copper, which is harder and  yet lighter because the interstices

are larger than in gold.  There is  mingled with it a fine and small portion of earth which comes out in  the  form

of rust.  These are a few of the conjectures which philosophy  forms,  when, leaving the eternal nature, she

turns for innocent  recreation to  consider the truths of generation. 

Water which is mingled with fire is called liquid because it rolls  upon the  earth, and soft because its bases

give way.  This becomes  more equable when  separated from fire and air, and then congeals into  hail or ice, or

the  looser forms of hoar frost or snow.  There are  other waters which are  called juices and are distilled through

plants.  Of these we may mention,  first, wine, which warms the soul as well as  the body; secondly, oily

substances, as for example, oil or pitch;  thirdly, honey, which relaxes the  contracted parts of the mouth and so

produces sweetness; fourthly,  vegetable acid, which is frothy and has  a burning quality and dissolves the

flesh.  Of the kinds of earth,  that which is filtered through water passes  into stone; the water is  broken up by

the earth and escapes in the form of  airthis in turn  presses upon the mass of earth, and the earth,

compressed  into an  indissoluble union with the remaining water, becomes rock.  Rock,  when  it is made up of

equal particles, is fair and transparent, but the  reverse when of unequal.  Earth is converted into pottery when

the  watery  part is suddenly drawn away; or if moisture remains, the earth,  when fused  by fire, becomes, on

cooling, a stone of a black colour.  When the earth is  finer and of a briny nature then two halfsolid  bodies are

formed by  separating the water,soda and salt.  The strong  compounds of earth and  water are not soluble by

water, but only by  fire.  Earth itself, when not  consolidated, is dissolved by water;  when consolidated, by fire

only.  The  cohesion of water, when strong,  is dissolved by fire only; when weak,  either by air or fire, the

former entering the interstices, the latter  penetrating even the  triangles.  Air when strongly condensed is

indissoluble by any power  which does not reach the triangles, and even when  not strongly  condensed is only

resolved by fire.  Compounds of earth and  water are  unaffected by water while the water occupies the

interstices in  them,  but begin to liquefy when fire enters into the interstices of the  water.  They are of two

kinds, some of them, like glass, having more  earth,  others, like wax, having more water in them. 

Having considered objects of sense, we now pass on to sensation.  But we  cannot explain sensation without

explaining the nature of  flesh and of the  mortal soul; and as we cannot treat of both together,  in order that we

may  proceed at once to the sensations we must assume  the existence of body and  soul. 

What makes fire burn?  The fineness of the sides, the sharpness of  the  angles, the smallness of the particles,

the quickness of the  motion.  Moreover, the pyramid, which is the figure of fire, is more  cutting than  any

other.  The feeling of cold is produced by the larger  particles of  moisture outside the body trying to eject the

smaller  ones in the body  which they compress.  The struggle which arises  between elements thus  unnaturally

brought together causes shivering.  That is hard to which the  flesh yields, and soft which yields to the  flesh,

and these two terms are  also relative to one another.  The  yielding matter is that which has the  slenderest base,

whereas that  which has a rectangular base is compact and  repellent.  Light and  heavy are wrongly explained

with reference to a lower  and higher in  place.  For in the universe, which is a sphere, there is no  opposition  of

above or below, and that which is to us above would be below  to a  man standing at the antipodes.  The greater

or less difficulty in  detaching any element from its like is the real cause of heaviness or  of  lightness.  If you

draw the earth into the dissimilar air, the  particles of  earth cling to their native element, and you more easily

detach a small  portion than a large.  There would be the same  difficulty in moving any of  the upper elements

towards the lower.  The  smooth and the rough are  severally produced by the union of evenness  with


Timaeus

Timaeus 13



Top




Page No 16


compactness, and of  hardness with inequality. 

Pleasure and pain are the most important of the affections common  to the  whole body.  According to our

general doctrine of sensation,  parts of the  body which are easily moved readily transmit the motion  to the

mind; but  parts which are not easily moved have no effect upon  the patient.  The  bones and hair are of the

latter kind, sight and  hearing of the former.  Ordinary affections are neither pleasant nor  painful.  The

impressions of  sight afford an example of these, and are  neither violent nor sudden.  But  sudden

replenishments of the body  cause pleasure, and sudden disturbances,  as for example cuttings and  burnings,

have the opposite effect. 

>From sensations common to the whole body, we proceed to those of  particular  parts.  The affections of the

tongue appear to be caused by  contraction and  dilation, but they have more of roughness or  smoothness than

is found in  other affections.  Earthy particles,  entering into the small veins of the  tongue which reach to the

heart,  when they melt into and dry up the little  veins are astringent if they  are rough; or if not so rough, they

are only  harsh, and if excessively  abstergent, like potash and soda, bitter.  Purgatives of a weaker sort  are

called salt and, having no bitterness, are  rather agreeable.  Inflammatory bodies, which by their lightness are

carried up into the  head, cutting all that comes in their way, are termed  pungent.  But  when these are refined

by putrefaction, and enter the narrow  veins of  the tongue, and meet there particles of earth and air, two kinds

of  globules are formedone of earthy and impure liquid, which boils and  ferments, the other of pure and

transparent water, which are called  bubbles; of all these affections the cause is termed acid.  When, on  the

other hand, the composition of the deliquescent particles is  congenial to  the tongue, and disposes the parts

according to their  nature, this remedial  power in them is called sweet. 

Smells are not divided into kinds; all of them are transitional,  and arise  out of the decomposition of one

element into another, for  the simple air or  water is without smell.  They are vapours or mists,  thinner than

water and  thicker than air:  and hence in drawing in the  breath, when there is an  obstruction, the air passes, but

there is no  smell.  They have no names,  but are distinguished as pleasant and  unpleasant, and their influence

extends over the whole region from the  head to the navel. 

Hearing is the effect of a stroke which is transmitted through the  ears by  means of the air, brain, and blood to

the soul, beginning at  the head and  extending to the liver.  The sound which moves swiftly is  acute; that which

moves slowly is grave; that which is uniform is  smooth, and the opposite is  harsh.  Loudness depends on the

quantity  of the sound.  Of the harmony of  sounds I will hereafter speak. 

Colours are flames which emanate from all bodies, having particles  corresponding to the sense of sight.  Some

of the particles are less  and  some larger, and some are equal to the parts of the sight.  The  equal  particles

appear transparent; the larger contract, and the  lesser dilate  the sight.  White is produced by the dilation, black

by  the contraction, of  the particles of sight.  There is also a swifter  motion of another sort of  fire which forces

a way through the passages  of the eyes, and elicits from  them a union of fire and water which we  call tears.

The inner fire flashes  forth, and the outer finds a way  in and is extinguished in the moisture,  and all sorts of

colours are  generated by the mixture.  This affection is  termed by us dazzling,  and the object which produces

it is called bright.  There is yet  another sort of fire which mingles with the moisture of the  eye  without

flashing, and produces a colour like bloodto this we give the  name of red.  A bright element mingling with

red and white produces a  colour which we call auburn.  The law of proportion, however,  according to  which

compound colours are formed, cannot be determined  scientifically or  even probably.  Red, when mingled with

black and  white, gives a purple hue,  which becomes umber when the colours are  burnt and there is a larger

admixture of black.  Flamecolour is a  mixture of auburn and dun; dun of  white and black; yellow of white

and  auburn.  White and bright meeting, and  falling upon a full black,  become dark blue; dark blue mingling

with white  becomes a light blue;  the union of flamecolour and black makes leekgreen.  There is no

difficulty in seeing how other colours are probably composed.  But he  who should attempt to test the truth of

this by experiment, would  forget the difference of the human and divine nature.  God only is  able to


Timaeus

Timaeus 14



Top




Page No 17


compound and resolve substances; such experiments are  impossible to man. 

These are the elements of necessity which the Creator received in  the world  of generation when he made the

allsufficient and perfect  creature, using  the secondary causes as his ministers, but himself  fashioning the

good in  all things.  For there are two sorts of causes,  the one divine, the other  necessary; and we should seek

to discover  the divine above all, and, for  their sake, the necessary, because  without them the higher cannot be

attained by us. 

Having now before us the causes out of which the rest of our  discourse is  to be framed, let us go back to the

point at which we  began, and add a fair  ending to our tale.  As I said at first, all  things were originally a chaos

in which there was no order or  proportion.  The elements of this chaos were  arranged by the Creator,  and out

of them he made the world.  Of the divine  he himself was the  author, but he committed to his offspring the

creation  of the mortal.  From him they received the immortal soul, but themselves  made the  body to be its

vehicle, and constructed within another soul which  was  mortal, and subject to terrible affectionspleasure,

the inciter of  evil; pain, which deters from good; rashness and fear, foolish  counsellors;  anger hard to be

appeased; hope easily led astray.  These  they mingled with  irrational sense and alldaring love according to

necessary laws and so  framed man.  And, fearing to pollute the divine  element, they gave the  mortal soul a

separate habitation in the  breast, parted off from the head  by a narrow isthmus.  And as in a  house the

women's apartments are divided  from the men's, the cavity of  the thorax was divided into two parts, a  higher

and a lower.  The  higher of the two, which is the seat of courage  and anger, lies nearer  to the head, between

the midriff and the neck, and  assists reason in  restraining the desires.  The heart is the house of guard  in which

all  the veins meet, and through them reason sends her commands to  the  extremity of her kingdom.  When the

passions are in revolt, or danger  approaches from without, then the heart beats and swells; and the  creating

powers, knowing this, implanted in the body the soft and  bloodless  substance of the lung, having a porous

and springy nature  like a sponge,  and being kept cool by drink and air which enters  through the trachea. 

The part of the soul which desires meat and drink was placed  between the  midriff and navel, where they

made a sort of manger; and  here they bound it  down, like a wild animal, away from the  councilchamber, and

leaving the  better principle undisturbed to  advise quietly for the good of the whole.  For the Creator knew that

the belly would not listen to reason, and was  under the power of idols  and fancies.  Wherefore he framed the

liver to  connect with the lower  nature, contriving that it should be compact, and  bright, and sweet,  and also

bitter and smooth, in order that the power of  thought which  originates in the mind might there be reflected,

terrifying  the belly  with the elements of bitterness and gall, and a suffusion of  bilious  colours when the liver

is contracted, and causing pain and misery  by  twisting out of its place the lobe and closing up the vessels and

gates.  And the converse happens when some gentle inspiration coming  from  intelligence mirrors the opposite

fancies, giving rest and  sweetness and  freedom, and at night, moderation and peace accompanied  with

prophetic  insight, when reason and sense are asleep.  For the  authors of our being,  in obedience to their

Father's will and in order  to make men as good as  they could, gave to the liver the power of  divination, which

is never  active when men are awake or in health; but  when they are under the  influence of some disorder or

enthusiasm then  they receive intimations,  which have to be interpreted by others who  are called prophets, but

should  rather be called interpreters of  prophecy; after death these intimations  become unintelligible.  The

spleen which is situated in the neighbourhood,  on the left side, keeps  the liver bright and clean, as a napkin

does a  mirror, and the  evacuations of the liver are received into it; and being a  hollow  tissue it is for a time

swollen with these impurities, but when the  body is purged it returns to its natural size. 

The truth concerning the soul can only be established by the word  of God.  Still, we may venture to assert

what is probable both  concerning soul and  body. 

The creative powers were aware of our tendency to excess.  And so  when they  made the belly to be a

receptacle for food, in order that  men might not  perish by insatiable gluttony, they formed the  convolutions of

the  intestines, in this way retarding the passage of  food through the body,  lest mankind should be absorbed in


Timaeus

Timaeus 15



Top




Page No 18


eating and  drinking, and the whole race  become impervious to divine philosophy. 

The creation of bones and flesh was on this wise.  The foundation  of these  is the marrow which binds together

body and soul, and the  marrow is made  out of such of the primary triangles as are adapted by  their perfection

to  produce all the four elements.  These God took and  mingled them in due  proportion, making as many kinds

of marrow as  there were hereafter to be  kinds of souls.  The receptacle of the  divine soul he made round, and

called that portion of the marrow  brain, intending that the vessel  containing this substance should be  the head.

The remaining part he  divided into long and round figures,  and to these as to anchors, fastening  the mortal

soul, he proceeded to  make the rest of the body, first forming  for both parts a covering of  bone.  The bone was

formed by sifting pure  smooth earth and wetting it  with marrow.  It was then thrust alternately  into fire and

water, and  thus rendered insoluble by either.  Of bone he  made a globe which he  placed around the brain,

leaving a narrow opening,  and around the  marrow of the neck and spine he formed the vertebrae, like  hinges,

which extended from the head through the whole of the trunk.  And  as  the bone was brittle and liable to

mortify and destroy the marrow by  too  great rigidity and susceptibility to heat and cold, he contrived  sinews

and  fleshthe first to give flexibility, the second to guard  against heat and  cold, and to be a protection

against falls,  containing a warm moisture,  which in summer exudes and cools the body,  and in winter is a

defence  against cold.  Having this in view, the  Creator mingled earth with fire and  water and mixed with them

a  ferment of acid and salt, so as to form pulpy  flesh.  But the sinews  he made of a mixture of bone and

unfermented flesh,  giving them a mean  nature between the two, and a yellow colour.  Hence they  were more

glutinous than flesh, but softer than bone.  The bones which have  most  of the living soul within them he

covered with the thinnest film of  flesh, those which have least of it, he lodged deeper.  At the joints  he

diminished the flesh in order not to impede the flexure of the  limbs, and  also to avoid clogging the

perceptions of the mind.  About  the thighs and  arms, which have no sense because there is little soul  in the

marrow, and  about the inner bones, he laid the flesh thicker.  For where the flesh is  thicker there is less

feeling, except in  certain parts which the Creator  has made solely of flesh, as for  example, the tongue.  Had

the combination  of solid bone and thick  flesh been consistent with acute perceptions, the  Creator would have

given man a sinewy and fleshy head, and then he would  have lived twice  as long.  But our creators were of

opinion that a shorter  life which  was better was preferable to a longer which was worse, and  therefore  they

covered the head with thin bone, and placed the sinews at  the  extremity of the head round the neck, and

fastened the jawbones to them  below the face.  And they framed the mouth, having teeth and tongue  and  lips,

with a view to the necessary and the good; for food is a  necessity,  and the river of speech is the best of rivers.

Still, the  head could not  be left a bare globe of bone on account of the extremes  of heat and cold,  nor be

allowed to become dull and senseless by an  overgrowth of flesh.  Wherefore it was covered by a peel or skin

which  met and grew by the help  of the cerebral humour.  The diversity of the  sutures was caused by the

struggle of the food against the courses of  the soul.  The skin of the head  was pierced by fire, and out of the

punctures came forth a moisture, part  liquid, and part of a skinny  nature, which was hardened by the pressure

of  the external cold and  became hair.  And God gave hair to the head of man to  be a light  covering, so that it

might not interfere with his perceptions.  Nails  were formed by combining sinew, skin, and bone, and were

made by the  creators with a view to the future when, as they knew, women and other  animals who would

require them would be framed out of man. 

The gods also mingled natures akin to that of man with other forms  and  perceptions.  Thus trees and plants

were created, which were  originally  wild and have been adapted by cultivation to our use.  They  partake of

that  third kind of life which is seated between the midriff  and the navel, and  is altogether passive and

incapable of reflection. 

When the creators had furnished all these natures for our  sustenance, they  cut channels through our bodies as

in a garden,  watering them with a  perennial stream.  Two were cut down the back,  along the back bone, where

the skin and flesh meet, one on the right  and the other on the left, having  the marrow of generation between

them.  In the next place, they divided the  veins about the head and  interlaced them with each other in order

that they  might form an  additional link between the head and the body, and that the  sensations  from both


Timaeus

Timaeus 16



Top




Page No 19


sides might be diffused throughout the body.  In the  third  place, they contrived the passage of liquids, which

may be explained  in this way:Finer bodies retain coarser, but not the coarser the  finer,  and the belly is

capable of retaining food, but not fire and  air.  God  therefore formed a network of fire and air to irrigate the

veins, having  within it two lesser nets, and stretched cords reaching  from both the  lesser nets to the extremity

of the outer net.  The  inner parts of the net  were made by him of fire, the lesser nets and  their cavities of air.

The  two latter he made to pass into the mouth;  the one ascending by the air  pipes from the lungs, the other

by the  side of the airpipes from the  belly.  The entrance to the first he  divided into two parts, both of which

he made to meet at the channels  of the nose, that when the mouth was closed  the passage connected with  it

might still be fed with air.  The cavity of  the network he spread  around the hollows of the body, making the

entire  receptacle to flow  into and out of the lesser nets and the lesser nets into  and out of  it, while the outer

net found a way into and out of the pores of  the  body, and the internal heat followed the air to and fro.  These,

as we  affirm, are the phenomena of respiration.  And all this process takes  place  in order that the body may be

watered and cooled and nourished,  and the  meat and drink digested and liquefied and carried into the  veins. 

The causes of respiration have now to be considered.  The  exhalation of the  breath through the mouth and

nostrils displaces the  external air, and at  the same time leaves a vacuum into which through  the pores the air

which is  displaced enters.  Also the vacuum which is  made when the air is exhaled  through the pores is filled

up by the  inhalation of breath through the  mouth and nostrils.  The explanation  of this double phenomenon is

as  follows:Elements move towards their  natural places.  Now as every animal  has within him a fountain of

fire, the air which is inhaled through the  mouth and nostrils, on  coming into contact with this, is heated; and

when  heated, in  accordance with the law of attraction, it escapes by the way it  entered toward the place of

fire.  On leaving the body it is cooled  and  drives round the air which it displaces through the pores into the

empty  lungs.  This again is in turn heated by the internal fire and  escapes, as  it entered, through the pores. 

The phenomena of medical cuppingglasses, of swallowing, and of the  hurling  of bodies, are to be explained

on a similar principle; as also  sounds,  which are sometimes discordant on account of the inequality of  them,

and  again harmonious by reason of equality.  The slower sounds  reaching the  swifter, when they begin to

pause, by degrees assimilate  with them:  whence  arises a pleasure which even the unwise feel, and  which to

the wise becomes  a higher sense of delight, being an  imitation of divine harmony in mortal  motions.  Streams

flow,  lightnings play, amber and the magnet attract, not  by reason of  attraction, but because 'nature abhors a

vacuum,' and because  things,  when compounded or dissolved, move different ways, each to its own  place. 

I will now return to the phenomena of respiration.  The fire,  entering the  belly, minces the food, and as it

escapes, fills the  veins by drawing after  it the divided portions, and thus the streams  of nutriment are diffused

through the body.  The fruits or herbs which  are our daily sustenance take  all sorts of colours when

intermixed,  but the colour of red or fire  predominates, and hence the liquid which  we call blood is red, being

the  nurturing principle of the body,  whence all parts are watered and empty  places filled. 

The process of repletion and depletion is produced by the  attraction of  like to like, after the manner of the

universal motion.  The external  elements by their attraction are always diminishing the  substance of the  body:

the particles of blood, too, formed out of the  newly digested food,  are attracted towards kindred elements

within the  body and so fill up the  void.  When more is taken away than flows in,  then we decay; and when

less,  we grow and increase. 

The young of every animal has the triangles new and closely locked  together, and yet the entire frame is soft

and delicate, being newly  made  of marrow and nurtured on milk.  These triangles are sharper than  those  which

enter the body from without in the shape of food, and  therefore they  cut them up.  But as life advances, the

triangles wear  out and are no  longer able to assimilate food; and at length, when the  bonds which unite  the

triangles of the marrow become undone, they in  turn unloose the bonds  of the soul; and if the release be

according to  nature, she then flies away  with joy.  For the death which is natural  is pleasant, but that which is

caused by violence is painful. 


Timaeus

Timaeus 17



Top




Page No 20


Every one may understand the origin of diseases.  They may be  occasioned by  the disarrangement or

disproportion of the elements out  of which the body  is framed.  This is the origin of many of them, but  the

worst of all owe  their severity to the following causes:  There is  a natural order in the  human frame according

to which the flesh and  sinews are made of blood, the  sinews out of the fibres, and the flesh  out of the

congealed substance  which is formed by separation from the  fibres.  The glutinous matter which  comes away

from the sinews and the  flesh, not only binds the flesh to the  bones, but nourishes the bones  and waters the

marrow.  When these processes  take place in regular  order the body is in health. 

But when the flesh wastes and returns into the veins there is  discoloured  blood as well as air in the veins,

having acid and salt  qualities, from  which is generated every sort of phlegm and bile.  All  things go the wrong

way and cease to give nourishment to the body, no  longer preserving their  natural courses, but at war with

themselves  and destructive to the  constitution of the body.  The oldest part of  the flesh which is hard to

decompose blackens from long burning, and  from being corroded grows bitter,  and as the bitter element

refines  away, becomes acid.  When tinged with  blood the bitter substance has a  red colour, and this when

mixed with black  takes the hue of grass; or  again, the bitter substance has an auburn  colour, when new flesh

is  decomposed by the internal flame.  To all which  phenomena some  physician or philosopher who was able

to see the one in many  has given  the name of bile.  The various kinds of bile have names answering  to  their

colours.  Lymph or serum is of two kinds:  first, the whey of  blood, which is gentle; secondly, the secretion of

dark and bitter  bile,  which, when mingled under the influence of heat with salt, is  malignant and  is called acid

phlegm.  There is also white phlegm,  formed by the  decomposition of young and tender flesh, and covered

with little bubbles,  separately invisible, but becoming visible when  collected.  The water of  tears and

perspiration and similar substances  is also the watery part of  fresh phlegm.  All these humours become

sources of disease when the blood  is replenished in irregular ways and  not by food or drink.  The danger,

however, is not so great when the  foundation remains, for then there is a  possibility of recovery.  But  when the

substance which unites the flesh and  bones is diseased, and  is no longer renewed from the muscles and

sinews,  and instead of being  oily and smooth and glutinous becomes rough and salt  and dry, then the  fleshy

parts fall away and leave the sinews bare and full  of brine,  and the flesh gets back again into the circulation of

the blood,  and  makes the previously mentioned disorders still greater.  There are  other and worse diseases

which are prior to these; as when the bone  through  the density of the flesh does not receive sufficient air, and

becomes  stagnant and gangrened, and crumbling away passes into the  food, and the  food into the flesh, and

the flesh returns again into  the blood.  Worst of  all and most fatal is the disease of the marrow,  by which the

whole course  of the body is reversed.  There is a third  class of diseases which are  produced, some by wind and

some by phlegm  and some by bile.  When the lung,  which is the steward of the air, is  obstructed, by rheums,

and in one part  no air, and in another too  much, enters in, then the parts which are  unrefreshed by air corrode,

and other parts are distorted by the excess of  air; and in this manner  painful diseases are produced.  The most

painful  are caused by wind  generated within the body, which gets about the great  sinews of the

shouldersthese are termed tetanus.  The cure of them is  difficult,  and in most cases they are relieved only

by fever.  White  phlegm,  which is dangerous if kept in, by reason of the air bubbles, is not  equally dangerous

if able to escape through the pores, although it  variegates the body, generating diverse kinds of leprosies.  If,

when  mingled with black bile, it disturbs the courses of the head in sleep,  there is not so much danger; but if

it assails those who are awake,  then  the attack is far more dangerous, and is called epilepsy or the  sacred

disease.  Acid and salt phlegm is the source of catarrh. 

Inflammations originate in bile, which is sometimes relieved by  boils and  swellings, but when detained, and

above all when mingled  with pure blood,  generates many inflammatory disorders, disturbing the  position of

the  fibres which are scattered about in the blood in order  to maintain the  balance of rare and dense which is

necessary to its  regular circulation.  If the bile, which is only stale blood, or  liquefied flesh, comes in little  by

little, it is congealed by the  fibres and produces internal cold and  shuddering.  But when it enters  with more of

a flood it overcomes the  fibres by its heat and reaches  the spinal marrow, and burning up the cables  of the

soul sets her free  from the body.  When on the other hand the body,  though wasted, still  holds out, then the

bile is expelled, like an exile  from a factious  state, causing associating diarrhoeas and dysenteries and  similar


Timaeus

Timaeus 18



Top




Page No 21


disorders.  The body which is diseased from the effects of fire is  in  a continual fever; when air is the agent, the

fever is quotidian; when  water, the fever intermits a day; when earth, which is the most  sluggish  element, the

fever intermits three days and is with  difficulty shaken off. 

Of mental disorders there are two sorts, one madness, the other  ignorance,  and they may be justly attributed

to disease.  Excessive  pleasures or pains  are among the greatest diseases, and deprive men of  their senses.

When the  seed about the spinal marrow is too abundant,  the body has too great  pleasures and pains; and

during a great part of  his life he who is the  subject of them is more or less mad.  He is  often thought bad, but

this is  a mistake; for the truth is that the  intemperance of lust is due to the  fluidity of the marrow produced by

the loose consistency of the bones.  And  this is true of vice in  general, which is commonly regarded as

disgraceful,  whereas it is  really involuntary and arises from a bad habit of the body  and evil  education.  In like

manner the soul is often made vicious by the  influence of bodily pain; the briny phlegm and other bitter and

bilious  humours wander over the body and find no exit, but are  compressed within,  and mingle their own

vapours with the motions of  the soul, and are carried  to the three places of the soul, creating  infinite varieties

of trouble and  melancholy, of rashness and  cowardice, of forgetfulness and stupidity.  When men are in this

evil  plight of body, and evil forms of government and  evil discourses are  superadded, and there is no

education to save them,  they are corrupted  through two causes; but of neither of them are they  really the

authors.  For the planters are to blame rather than the plants,  the  educators and not the educated.  Still, we

should endeavour to attain  virtue and avoid vice; but this is part of another subject. 

Enough of diseaseI have now to speak of the means by which the  mind and  body are to be preserved, a

higher theme than the other.  The  good is the  beautiful, and the beautiful is the symmetrical, and there  is no

greater or  fairer symmetry than that of body and soul, as the  contrary is the greatest  of deformities.  A leg or

an arm too long or  too short is at once ugly and  unserviceable, and the same is true if  body and soul are

disproportionate.  For a strong and impassioned soul  may 'fret the pigmy body to decay,' and  so produce

convulsions and  other evils.  The violence of controversy, or  the earnestness of  enquiry, will often generate

inflammations and rheums  which are not  understood, or assigned to their true cause by the professors  of

medicine.  And in like manner the body may be too much for the soul,  darkening the reason, and quickening

the animal desires.  The only  security  is to preserve the balance of the two, and to this end the  mathematician

or  philosopher must practise gymnastics, and the gymnast  must cultivate music.  The parts of the body too

must be treated in the  same waythey should  receive their appropriate exercise.  For the  body is set in

motion when it  is heated and cooled by the elements  which enter in, or is dried up and  moistened by external

things; and,  if given up to these processes when at  rest, it is liable to  destruction.  But the natural motion, as in

the  world, so also in the  human frame, produces harmony and divides hostile  powers.  The best  exercise is the

spontaneous motion of the body, as in  gymnastics,  because most akin to the motion of mind; not so good is

the  motion of  which the source is in another, as in sailing or riding; least  good  when the body is at rest and

the motion is in parts only, which is a  species of motion imparted by physic.  This should only be resorted to

by  men of sense in extreme cases; lesser diseases are not to be  irritated by  medicine.  For every disease is akin

to the living being  and has an  appointed term, just as life has, which depends on the form  of the  triangles, and

cannot be protracted when they are worn out.  And he who,  instead of accepting his destiny, endeavours to

prolong  his life by  medicine, is likely to multiply and magnify his diseases.  Regimen and not  medicine is the

true cure, when a man has time at his  disposal. 

Enough of the nature of man and of the body, and of training and  education.  The subject is a great one and

cannot be adequately treated  as an appendage  to another.  To sum up all in a word:  there are three  kinds of

soul  located within us, and any one of them, if remaining  inactive, becomes very  weak; if exercised, very

strong.  Wherefore we  should duly train and  exercise all three kinds. 

The divine soul God lodged in the head, to raise us, like plants  which are  not of earthly origin, to our kindred;

for the head is  nearest to heaven.  He who is intent upon the gratification of his  desires and cherishes the

mortal soul, has all his ideas mortal, and  is himself mortal in the truest  sense.  But he who seeks after


Timaeus

Timaeus 19



Top




Page No 22


knowledge and exercises the divine part of  himself in godly and  immortal thoughts, attains to truth and

immortality,  as far as is  possible to man, and also to happiness, while he is training  up within  him the divine

principle and indwelling power of order.  There is  only  one way in which one person can benefit another; and

that is by  assigning to him his proper nurture and motion.  To the motions of the  soul  answer the motions of

the universe, and by the study of these the  individual is restored to his original nature. 

Thus we have finished the discussion of the universe, which,  according to  our original intention, has now

been brought down to the  creation of man.  Completeness seems to require that something should  be briefly

said about  other animals:  first of women, who are probably  degenerate and cowardly  men.  And when they

degenerated, the gods  implanted in men the desire of  union with them, creating in man one  animate substance

and in woman another  in the following manner:The  outlet for liquids they connected with the  living

principle of the  spinal marrow, which the man has the desire to emit  into the fruitful  womb of the woman;

this is like a fertile field in which  the seed is  quickened and matured, and at last brought to light.  When this

desire  is unsatisfied the man is overmastered by the power of the  generative  organs, and the woman is

subjected to disorders from the  obstruction  of the passages of the breath, until the two meet and pluck the

fruit  of the tree. 

The race of birds was created out of innocent, lightminded men,  who  thought to pursue the study of the

heavens by sight; these were  transformed  into birds, and grew feathers instead of hair.  The race  of wild

animals  were men who had no philosophy, and never looked up to  heaven or used the  courses of the head, but

followed only the  influences of passion.  Naturally they turned to their kindred earth,  and put their forelegs to

the  ground, and their heads were crushed  into strange oblong forms.  Some of  them have four feet, and some

of  them more than four,the latter, who are  the more senseless, drawing  closer to their native element; the

most  senseless of all have no  limbs and trail their whole body on the ground.  The fourth kind are  the

inhabitants of the waters; these are made out of  the most  senseless and ignorant and impure of men, whom

God placed in the  uttermost parts of the world in return for their utter ignorance, and  caused them to respire

water instead of the pure element of air.  Such  are  the laws by which animals pass into one another. 

And so the world received animals, mortal and immortal, and was  fulfilled  with them, and became a visible

God, comprehending the  visible, made in the  image of the Intellectual, being the one perfect  onlybegotten

heaven. 

Section 2. 

Nature in the aspect which she presented to a Greek philosopher of  the  fourth century before Christ is not

easily reproduced to modern  eyes.  The  associations of mythology and poetry have to be added, and  the

unconscious  influence of science has to be subtracted, before we  can behold the heavens  or the earth as they

appeared to the Greek.  The philosopher himself was a  child and also a mana child in the  range of his

attainments, but also a  great intelligence having an  insight into nature, and often anticipations  of the truth.  He

was  full of original thoughts, and yet liable to be  imposed upon by the  most obvious fallacies.  He

occasionally confused  numbers with ideas,  and atoms with numbers; his a priori notions were out  of all

proportion to his experience.  He was ready to explain the phenomena  of the heavens by the most trivial

analogies of earth.  The  experiments  which nature worked for him he sometimes accepted, but he  never tried

experiments for himself which would either prove or  disprove his theories.  His knowledge was unequal;

while in some  branches, such as medicine and  astronomy, he had made considerable  proficiency, there were

others, such as  chemistry, electricity,  mechanics, of which the very names were unknown to  him.  He was the

natural enemy of mythology, and yet mythological ideas  still retained  their hold over him.  He was

endeavouring to form a  conception of  principles, but these principles or ideas were regarded by  him as real

powers or entities, to which the world had been subjected.  He  was  always tending to argue from what was

near to what was remote, from  what was known to what was unknown, from man to the universe, and back

again from the universe to man.  While he was arranging the world, he  was  arranging the forms of thought in


Timaeus

Timaeus 20



Top




Page No 23


his own mind; and the light from  within  and the light from without often crossed and helped to confuse  one

another.  He might be compared to a builder engaged in some great  design, who could  only dig with his hands

because he was unprovided  with common tools; or to  some poet or musician, like Tynnichus (Ion),  obliged to

accommodate his  lyric raptures to the limits of the  tetrachord or of the flute. 

The Hesiodic and Orphic cosmogonies were a phase of thought  intermediate  between mythology and

philosophy and had a great  influence on the  beginnings of knowledge.  There was nothing behind  them; they

were to  physical science what the poems of Homer were to  early Greek history.  They  made men think of the

world as a whole;  they carried the mind back into the  infinity of past time; they  suggested the first

observation of the effects  of fire and water on  the earth's surface.  To the ancient physics they  stood much in

the  same relation which geology does to modern science.  But  the Greek was  not, like the enquirer of the last

generation, confined to a  period of  six thousand years; he was able to speculate freely on the  effects of

infinite ages in the production of physical phenomena.  He could  imagine cities which had existed time out of

mind (States.; Laws),  laws or  forms of art and music which had lasted, 'not in word only,  but in very  truth, for

ten thousand years' (Laws); he was aware that  natural phenomena  like the Delta of the Nile might have

slowly  accumulated in long periods of  time (Hdt.).  But he seems to have  supposed that the course of events

was  recurring rather than  progressive.  To this he was probably led by the  fixedness of Egyptian  customs and

the general observation that there were  other  civilisations in the world more ancient than that of Hellas. 

The ancient philosophers found in mythology many ideas which, if  not  originally derived from nature, were

easily transferred to  hersuch, for  example, as love or hate, corresponding to attraction  or repulsion; or the

conception of necessity allied both to the  regularity and irregularity of  nature; or of chance, the nameless or

unknown cause; or of justice,  symbolizing the law of compensation; are  of the Fates and Furies, typifying  the

fixed order or the  extraordinary convulsions of nature.  Their own  interpretations of  Homer and the poets were

supposed by them to be the  original meaning.  Musing in themselves on the phenomena of nature, they  were

relieved  at being able to utter the thoughts of their hearts in  figures of  speech which to them were not figures,

and were already  consecrated by  tradition.  Hesiod and the Orphic poets moved in a region of

halfpersonification in which the meaning or principle appeared  through the  person.  In their vaster

conceptions of Chaos, Erebus,  Aether, Night, and  the like, the first rude attempts at generalization  are dimly

seen.  The  Gods themselves, especially the greater Gods,  such as Zeus, Poseidon,  Apollo, Athene, are

universals as well as  individuals.  They were gradually  becoming lost in a common conception  of mind or

God.  They continued to  exist for the purposes of ritual or  of art; but from the sixth century  onwards or even

earlier there arose  and gained strength in the minds of men  the notion of 'one God,  greatest among Gods and

men, who was all sight, all  hearing, all  knowing' (Xenophanes). 

Under the influence of such ideas, perhaps also deriving from the  traditions of their own or of other nations

scraps of medicine and  astronomy, men came to the observation of nature.  The Greek  philosopher  looked at

the blue circle of the heavens and it flashed  upon him that all  things were one; the tumult of sense abated, and

the  mind found repose in  the thought which former generations had been  striving to realize.  The  first

expression of this was some element,  rarefied by degrees into a pure  abstraction, and purged from any

tincture of sense.  Soon an inner world of  ideas began to be unfolded,  more absorbing, more overpowering,

more abiding  than the brightest of  visible objects, which to the eye of the philosopher  looking inward,

seemed to pale before them, retaining only a faint and  precarious  existence.  At the same time, the minds of

men parted into the  two  great divisions of those who saw only a principle of motion, and of  those who saw

only a principle of rest, in nature and in themselves;  there  were born Heracliteans or Eleatics, as there have

been in later  ages born  Aristotelians or Platonists.  Like some philosophers in  modern times, who  are accused

of making a theory first and finding  their facts afterwards,  the advocates of either opinion never thought  of

applying either to  themselves or to their adversaries the criterion  of fact.  They were  mastered by their ideas

and not masters of them.  Like the Heraclitean  fanatics whom Plato has ridiculed in the  Theaetetus, they were

incapable of  giving a reason of the faith that  was in them, and had all the animosities  of a religious sect.  Yet,

doubtless, there was some first impression  derived from external  nature, which, as in mythology, so also in


Timaeus

Timaeus 21



Top




Page No 24


philosophy, worked upon the  minds of the first thinkers.  Though incapable  of induction or  generalization in

the modern sense, they caught an  inspiration from  the external world.  The most general facts or appearances

of nature,  the circle of the universe, the nutritive power of water, the  air  which is the breath of life, the

destructive force of fire, the seeming  regularity of the greater part of nature and the irregularity of a  remnant,

the recurrence of day and night and of the seasons, the solid  earth and the  impalpable aether, were always

present to them. 

The great source of error and also the beginning of truth to them  was  reasoning from analogy; they could see

resemblances, but not  differences;  and they were incapable of distinguishing illustration  from argument.

Analogy in modern times only points the way, and is  immediately verified by  experiment.  The dreams and

visions, which  pass through the philosopher's  mind, of resemblances between different  classes of substances,

or between  the animal and vegetable world, are  put into the refiner's fire, and the  dross and other elements

which  adhere to them are purged away.  But the  contemporary of Plato and  Socrates was incapable of

resisting the power of  any analogy which  occurred to him, and was drawn into any consequences  which

seemed to  follow.  He had no methods of difference or of concomitant  variations,  by the use of which he

could distinguish the accidental from  the  essential.  He could not isolate phenomena, and he was helpless

against  the influence of any word which had an equivocal or double sense. 

Yet without this crude use of analogy the ancient physical  philosopher  would have stood still; he could not

have made even 'one  guess among many'  without comparison.  The course of natural phenomena  would have

passed  unheeded before his eyes, like fair sights or  musical sounds before the  eyes and ears of an animal.

Even the  fetichism of the savage is the  beginning of reasoning; the assumption  of the most fanciful of causes

indicates a higher mental state than  the absence of all enquiry about them.  The tendency to argue from the

higher to the lower, from man to the world,  has led to many errors,  but has also had an elevating influence on

philosophy.  The conception  of the world as a whole, a person, an animal,  has been the source of  hasty

generalizations; yet this general grasp of  nature led also to a  spirit of comprehensiveness in early philosophy,

which  has not  increased, but rather diminished, as the fields of knowledge have  become more divided. The

modern physicist confines himself to one or  perhaps two branches of science.  But he comparatively seldom

rises  above  his own department, and often falls under the narrowing  influence which any  single branch, when

pursued to the exclusion of  every other, has over the  mind.  Language, two, exercised a spell over  the

beginnings of physical  philosophy, leading to error and sometimes  to truth; for many thoughts were

suggested by the double meanings of  words (Greek), and the accidental  distinctions of words sometimes led

the ancient philosopher to make  corresponding differences in things  (Greek).  'If they are the same, why  have

they different names; or if  they are different, why have they the same  name?'is an argument not  easily

answered in the infancy of knowledge.  The modern philosopher  has always been taught the lesson which he

still  imperfectly learns,  that he must disengage himself from the influence of  words.  Nor are  there wanting in

Plato, who was himself too often the  victim of them,  impressive admonitions that we should regard not words

but  things  (States.).  But upon the whole, the ancients, though not entirely  dominated by them, were much

more subject to the influence of words  than  the moderns.  They had no clear divisions of colours or

substances; even  the four elements were undefined; the fields of  knowledge were not parted  off.  They were

bringing order out of  disorder, having a small grain of  experience mingled in a confused  heap of a priori

notions.  And yet,  probably, their first impressions,  the illusions and mirages of their  fancy, created a greater

intellectual activity and made a nearer approach  to the truth than any  patient investigation of isolated facts,

for which  the time had not  yet come, could have accomplished. 

There was one more illusion to which the ancient philosophers were  subject,  and against which Plato in his

later dialogues seems to be  strugglingthe  tendency to mere abstractions; not perceiving that  pure

abstraction is only  negation, they thought that the greater the  abstraction the greater the  truth.  Behind any pair

of ideas a new  idea which comprehended themthe  (Greek), as it was technically  termedbegan at once to

appear.  Two are  truer than three, one than  two.  The words 'being,' or 'unity,' or  essence,' or 'good,' became

sacred to them.  They did not see that they had  a word only, and in  one sense the most unmeaning of words.


Timaeus

Timaeus 22



Top




Page No 25


They did not  understand that  the content of notions is in inverse proportion to their  universalitythe element

which is the most widely diffused is also  the  thinnest; or, in the language of the common logic, the greater the

extension the less the comprehension.  But this vacant idea of a whole  without parts, of a subject without

predicates, a rest without motion,  has  been also the most fruitful of all ideas.  It is the beginning of  a priori

thought, and indeed of thinking at all.  Men were led to  conceive it, not  by a love of hasty generalization, but

by a divine  instinct, a dialectical  enthusiasm, in which the human faculties  seemed to yearn for enlargement.

We know that 'being' is only the verb  of existence, the copula, the most  general symbol of relation, the  first

and most meagre of abstractions; but  to some of the ancient  philosophers this little word appeared to attain

divine proportions,  and to comprehend all truth.  Being or essence, and  similar words,  represented to them a

supreme or divine being, in which they  thought  that they found the containing and continuing principle of the

universe.  In a few years the human mind was peopled with  abstractions; a  new world was called into

existence to give law and  order to the old.  But  between them there was still a gulf, and no one  could pass

from the one to  the other. 

Number and figure were the greatest instruments of thought which  were  possessed by the Greek philosopher;

having the same power over  the mind  which was exerted by abstract ideas, they were also capable  of practical

application.  Many curious and, to the early thinker,  mysterious properties  of them came to light when they

were compared  with one another.  They  admitted of infinite multiplication and  construction; in Pythagorean

triangles or in proportions of 1:2:4:8  and 1:3:9:27, or compounds of them,  the laws of the world seemed to be

more than half revealed.  They were also  capable of infinite  subdivisiona wonder and also a puzzle to the

ancient  thinker (Rep.).  They were not, like being or essence, mere vacant  abstractions, but  admitted of

progress and growth, while at the same time  they confirmed  a higher sentiment of the mind, that there was

order in the  universe.  And so there began to be a real sympathy between the world  within and  the world

without.  The numbers and figures which were present  to the  mind's eye became visible to the eye of sense;

the truth of nature  was  mathematics; the other properties of objects seemed to reappear only in  the light of

number.  Law and morality also found a natural expression  in  number and figure.  Instruments of such power

and elasticity could  not fail  to be 'a most gracious assistance' to the first efforts of  human  intelligence. 

There was another reason why numbers had so great an influence over  the  minds of early thinkersthey

were verified by experience.  Every  use of  them, even the most trivial, assured men of their truth; they  were

everywhere to be found, in the least things and the greatest  alike.  One,  two, three, counted on the fingers was

a 'trivial matter  (Rep.), a little  instrument out of which to create a world; but from  these and by the help  of

these all our knowledge of nature has been  developed.  They were the  measure of all things, and seemed to

give  law to all things; nature was  rescued from chaos and confusion by  their power; the notes of music, the

motions of the stars, the forms  of atoms, the evolution and recurrence of  days, months, years, the  military

divisions of an army, the civil divisions  of a state, seemed  to afford a 'present witness' of themwhat would

have  become of man  or of the world if deprived of number (Rep.)?  The mystery of  number  and the mystery

of music were akin.  There was a music of rhythm and  of harmonious motion everywhere; and to the real

connexion which  existed  between music and number, a fanciful or imaginary relation was  superadded.  There

was a music of the spheres as well as of the notes  of the lyre.  If  in all things seen there was number and

figure, why  should they not also  pervade the unseen world, with which by their  wonderful and unchangeable

nature they seemed to hold communion? 

Two other points strike us in the use which the ancient  philosophers made  of numbers.  First, they applied to

external nature  the relations of them  which they found in their own minds; and where  nature seemed to be at

variance with number, as for example in the  case of fractions, they  protested against her (Rep.; Arist.

Metaph.).  Having long meditated on the  properties of 1:2:4:8, or 1:3:9:27, or  of 3, 4, 5, they discovered in

them  many curious correspondences and  were disposed to find in them the secret  of the universe.  Secondly,

they applied number and figure equally to those  parts of physics, such  as astronomy or mechanics, in which

the modern  philosopher expects to  find them, and to those in which he would never  think of looking for  them,

such as physiology and psychology.  For the  sciences were not  yet divided, and there was nothing really


Timaeus

Timaeus 23



Top




Page No 26


irrational in  arguing that  the same laws which regulated the heavenly bodies were  partially  applied to the

erring limbs or brain of man.  Astrology was the  form  which the lively fancy of ancient thinkers almost

necessarily gave to  astronomy.  The observation that the lower principle, e.g. mechanics,  is  always seen in the

higher, e.g. in the phenomena of life, further  tended to  perplex them.  Plato's doctrine of the same and the

other  ruling the  courses of the heavens and of the human body is not a mere  vagary, but is a  natural result of

the state of knowledge and thought  at which he had  arrived. 

When in modern times we contemplate the heavens, a certain amount  of  scientific truth imperceptibly blends,

even with the cursory glance  of an  unscientific person.  He knows that the earth is revolving round  the sun,

and not the sun around the earth.  He does not imagine the  earth to be the  centre of the universe, and he has

some conception of  chemistry and the  cognate sciences.  A very different aspect of nature  would have been

present to the mind of the early Greek philosopher.  He would have beheld  the earth a surface only, not

mirrored, however  faintly, in the glass of  science, but indissolubly connected with some  theory of one, two,

or more  elements.  He would have seen the world  pervaded by number and figure,  animated by a principle of

motion,  immanent in a principle of rest.  He  would have tried to construct the  universe on a quantitative

principle,  seeming to find in endless  combinations of geometrical figures or in the  infinite variety of  their

sizes a sufficient account of the multiplicity of  phenomena.  To  these a priori speculations he would add a

rude conception  of matter  and his own immediate experience of health and disease.  His  cosmos  would

necessarily be imperfect and unequal, being the first attempt  to  impress form and order on the primaeval

chaos of human knowledge.  He  would see all things as in a dream. 

The ancient physical philosophers have been charged by Dr. Whewell  and  others with wasting their fine

intelligences in wrong methods of  enquiry;  and their progress in moral and political philosophy has been

sometimes  contrasted with their supposed failure in physical  investigations.  'They  had plenty of ideas,' says

Dr. Whewell, 'and  plenty of facts; but their  ideas did not accurately represent the  facts with which they were

acquainted.'  This is a very crude and  misleading way of describing ancient  science.  It is the mistake of an

uneducated personuneducated, that is,  in the higher sense of the  wordwho imagines every one else to be

like  himself and explains  every other age by his own.  No doubt the ancients  often fell into  strange and

fanciful errors:  the time had not yet arrived  for the  slower and surer path of the modern inductive philosophy.

But it  remains to be shown that they could have done more in their age and  country; or that the contributions

which they made to the sciences  with  which they were acquainted are not as great upon the whole as  those

made by  their successors.  There is no single step in astronomy  as great as that of  the nameless Pythagorean

who first conceived the  world to be a body moving  round the sun in space:  there is no truer  or more

comprehensive principle  than the application of mathematics  alike to the heavenly bodies, and to  the particles

of matter.  The  ancients had not the instruments which would  have enabled them to  correct or verify their

anticipations, and their  opportunities of  observation were limited.  Plato probably did more for  physical

science by asserting the supremacy of mathematics than Aristotle  or  his disciples by their collections of facts.

When the thinkers of  modern times, following Bacon, undervalue or disparage the  speculations of  ancient

philosophers, they seem wholly to forget the  conditions of the  world and of the human mind, under which

they  carried on their  investigations.  When we accuse them of being under  the influence of words,  do we

suppose that we are altogether free from  this illusion?  When we  remark that Greek physics soon became

stationary or extinct, may we not  observe also that there have been  and may be again periods in the history  of

modern philosophy which  have been barren and unproductive?  We might as  well maintain that  Greek art was

not real or great, because it had nihil  simile aut  secundum, as say that Greek physics were a failure because

they  admire  no subsequent progress. 

The charge of premature generalization which is often urged against  ancient  philosophers is really an

anachronism.  For they can hardly be  said to have  generalized at all.  They may be said more truly to have

cleared up and  defined by the help of experience ideas which they  already possessed.  The  beginnings of

thought about nature must always  have this character.  A true  method is the result of many ages of  experiment

and observation, and is  ever going on and enlarging with  the progress of science and knowledge.  At  first men


Timaeus

Timaeus 24



Top




Page No 27


personify nature,  then they form impressions of nature, at last  they conceive 'measure'  or laws of nature.  They

pass out of mythology into  philosophy.  Early  science is not a process of discovery in the modern  sense; but

rather  a process of correcting by observation, and to a certain  extent only,  the first impressions of nature,

which mankind, when they  began to  think, had received from poetry or language or unintelligent  sense.  Of all

scientific truths the greatest and simplest is the  uniformity  of nature; this was expressed by the ancients in

many ways, as  fate,  or necessity, or measure, or limit.  Unexpected events, of which the  cause was unknown

to them, they attributed to chance (Thucyd.).  But  their  conception of nature was never that of law interrupted

by  exceptions,a  somewhat unfortunate metaphysical invention of modern  times, which is at  variance with

facts and has failed to satisfy the  requirements of thought. 

Section 3. 

Plato's account of the soul is partly mythical or figurative, and  partly  literal.  Not that either he or we can draw

a line between  them, or say,  'This is poetry, this is philosophy'; for the transition  from the one to  the other is

imperceptible.  Neither must we expect to  find in him absolute  consistency.  He is apt to pass from one level or

stage of thought to  another without always making it apparent that he  is changing his ground.  In such

passages we have to interpret his  meaning by the general spirit of  his writings.  To reconcile his

inconsistencies would be contrary to the  first principles of criticism  and fatal to any true understanding of

him. 

There is a further difficulty in explaining this part of the  Timaeusthe  natural order of thought is inverted.

We begin with the  most abstract, and  proceed from the abstract to the concrete.  We are  searching into things

which are upon the utmost limit of human  intelligence, and then of a sudden  we fall rather heavily to the

earth.  There are no intermediate steps which  lead from one to the  other.  But the abstract is a vacant form to us

until  brought into  relation with man and nature.  God and the world are mere  names, like  the Being of the

Eleatics, unless some human qualities are  added on to  them.  Yet the negation has a kind of unknown meaning

to us.  The  priority of God and of the world, which he is imagined to have created,  to all other existences,

gives a solemn awe to them.  And as in other  systems of theology and philosophy, that of which we know

least has  the  greatest interest to us. 

There is no use in attempting to define or explain the first God in  the  Platonic system, who has sometimes

been thought to answer to God  the  Father; or the world, in whom the Fathers of the Church seemed to

recognize  'the firstborn of every creature.'  Nor need we discuss at  length how far  Plato agrees in the later

Jewish idea of creation,  according to which God  made the world out of nothing.  For his  original conception

of matter as  something which has no qualities is  really a negation.  Moreover in the  Hebrew Scriptures the

creation of  the world is described, even more  explicitly than in the Timaeus, not  as a single act, but as a work

or  process which occupied six days.  There is a chaos in both, and it would be  untrue to say that the  Greek,

any more than the Hebrew, had any definite  belief in the  eternal existence of matter.  The beginning of things

vanished into  the distance.  The real creation began, not with matter, but  with  ideas.  According to Plato in the

Timaeus, God took of the same and  the other, of the divided and undivided, of the finite and infinite,  and

made essence, and out of the three combined created the soul of  the world.  To the soul he added a body

formed out of the four  elements.  The general  meaning of these words is that God imparted  determinations of

thought, or,  as we might say, gave law and variety  to the material universe.  The  elements are moving in a

disorderly  manner before the work of creation  begins; and there is an eternal  pattern of the world, which, like

the 'idea  of good,' is not the  Creator himself, but not separable from him.  The  pattern too, though  eternal, is a

creation, a world of thought prior to the  world of  sense, which may be compared to the wisdom of God in the

book of  Ecclesiasticus, or to the 'God in the form of a globe' of the old  Eleatic  philosophers.  The visible,

which already exists, is fashioned  in the  likeness of this eternal pattern.  On the other hand, there is  no truth of

which Plato is more firmly convinced than of the priority  of the soul to  the body, both in the universe and in

man.  So  inconsistent are the forms  in which he describes the works which no  tongue can utterhis language,

as  he himself says, partaking of his  own uncertainty about the things of which  he is speaking. 


Timaeus

Timaeus 25



Top




Page No 28


We may remark in passing, that the Platonic compared with the  Jewish  description of the process of creation

has less of freedom or  spontaneity.  The Creator in Plato is still subject to a remnant of  necessity which he

cannot wholly overcome.  When his work is  accomplished he remains in his  own nature.  Plato is more

sensible  than the Hebrew prophet of the  existence of evil, which he seeks to  put as far as possible out of the

way  of God.  And he can only suppose  this to be accomplished by God retiring  into himself and committing

the lesser works of creation to inferior  powers.  (Compare, however,  Laws for another solution of the

difficulty.) 

Nor can we attach any intelligible meaning to his words when he  speaks of  the visible being in the image of

the invisible.  For how  can that which is  divided be like that which is undivided?  Or that  which is changing be

the  copy of that which is unchanging?  All the  old difficulties about the ideas  come back upon us in an altered

form.  We can imagine two worlds, one of  which is the mere double of the  other, or one of which is an

imperfect copy  of the other, or one of  which is the vanishing ideal of the other; but we  cannot imagine an

intellectual world which has no qualities'a thing in  itself'a  point which has no parts or magnitude, which

is nowhere, and  nothing.  This cannot be the archetype according to which God made the  world,  and is in

reality, whether in Plato or in Kant, a mere negative  residuum of human thought. 

There is another aspect of the same difficulty which appears to  have no  satisfactory solution.  In what relation

does the archetype  stand to the  Creator himself?  For the idea or pattern of the world is  not the thought  of

God, but a separate, selfexistent nature, of which  creation is the  copy.  We can only reply, (1) that to the

mind of  Plato subject and object  were not yet distinguished; (2) that he  supposes the process of creation to

take place in accordance with his  own theory of ideas; and as we cannot  give a consistent account of the  one,

neither can we of the other.  He  means (3) to say that the  creation of the world is not a material process  of

working with legs  and arms, but ideal and intellectual; according to his  own fine  expression, 'the thought of

God made the God that was to be.'  He  means (4) to draw an absolute distinction between the invisible or

unchangeable which is or is the place of mind or being, and the world  of  sense or becoming which is visible

and changing.  He means (5) that  the  idea of the world is prior to the world, just as the other ideas  are prior  to

sensible objects; and like them may be regarded as  eternal and self  existent, and also, like the IDEA of

good, may be  viewed apart from the  divine mind. 

There are several other questions which we might ask and which can  receive  no answer, or at least only an

answer of the same kind as the  preceding.  How can matter be conceived to exist without form?  Or, how  can

the  essences or forms of things be distinguished from the eternal  ideas, or  essence itself from the soul?  Or,

how could there have been  motion in the  chaos when as yet time was not?  Or, how did chaos come  into

existence, if  not by the will of the Creator?  Or, how could  there have been a time when  the world was not, if

time was not?  Or,  how could the Creator have taken  portions of an indivisible same?  Or,  how could space or

anything else have  been eternal when time is only  created?  Or, how could the surfaces of  geometrical figures

have  formed solids?  We must reply again that we cannot  follow Plato in all  his inconsistencies, but that the

gaps of thought are  probably more  apparent to us than to him.  He would, perhaps, have said  that 'the  first

things are known only to God and to him of men whom God  loves.'  How often have the gaps in Theology

been concealed from the eye of  faith!  And we may say that only by an effort of metaphysical  imagination  can

we hope to understand Plato from his own point of  view; we must not ask  for consistency.  Everywhere we

find traces of  the Platonic theory of  knowledge expressed in an objective form, which  by us has to be

translated  into the subjective, before we can attach  any meaning to it.  And this  theory is exhibited in so many

different  points of view, that we cannot  with any certainty interpret one  dialogue by another; e.g. the Timaeus

by  the Parmenides or Phaedrus or  Philebus. 

The soul of the world may also be conceived as the personification  of the  numbers and figures in which the

heavenly bodies move.  Imagine  these as in  a Pythagorean dream, stripped of qualitative difference  and

reduced to  mathematical abstractions.  They too conform to the  principle of the same,  and may be compared

with the modern conception  of laws of nature.  They are  in space, but not in time, and they are  the makers of


Timaeus

Timaeus 26



Top




Page No 29


time.  They are  represented as constantly thinking of  the same; for thought in the view of  Plato is equivalent to

truth or  law, and need not imply a human  consciousness, a conception which is  familiar enough to us, but has

no  place, hardly even a name, in  ancient Greek philosophy.  To this principle  of the same is opposed  the

principle of the otherthe principle of  irregularity and  disorder, of necessity and chance, which is only

partially  impressed  by mathematical laws and figures.  (We may observe by the way,  that  the principle of the

other, which is the principle of plurality and  variation in the Timaeus, has nothing in common with the 'other'

of  the  Sophist, which is the principle of determination.)  The element of  the same  dominates to a certain extent

over the otherthe fixed stars  keep the  'wanderers' of the inner circle in their courses, and a  similar principle

of fixedness or order appears to regulate the bodily  constitution of man.  But there still remains a rebellious

seed of evil  derived from the original  chaos, which is the source of disorder in  the world, and of vice and

disease in man. 

But what did Plato mean by essence, (Greek), which is the  intermediate  nature compounded of the Same and

the Other, and out of  which, together  with these two, the soul of the world is created?  It  is difficult to  explain

a process of thought so strange and  unaccustomed to us, in which  modern distinctions run into one another

and are lost sight of.  First, let  us consider once more the meaning  of the Same and the Other.  The Same is  the

unchanging and  indivisible, the heaven of the fixed stars, partaking of  the divine  nature, which, having law in

itself, gives law to all besides  and is  the element of order and permanence in man and on the earth.  It is  the

rational principle, mind regarded as a work, as creationnot as  the  creator.  The old tradition of Parmenides

and of the Eleatic  Being, the  foundation of so much in the philosophy of Greece and of  the world, was

lingering in Plato's mind.  The Other is the variable  or changing element,  the residuum of disorder or chaos,

which cannot  be reduced to order, nor  altogether banished, the source of evil, seen  in the errors of man and

also  in the wanderings of the planets, a  necessity which protrudes through  nature.  Of this too there was a

shadow in the Eleatic philosophy in the  realm of opinion, which, like  a mist, seemed to darken the purity of

truth  in itself.So far the  words of Plato may perhaps find an intelligible  meaning.  But when he  goes on to

speak of the Essence which is compounded  out of both, the  track becomes fainter and we can only follow him

with  hesitating  steps.  But still we find a trace reappearing of the teaching of  Anaxagoras:  'All was confusion,

and then mind came and arranged  things.'  We have already remarked that Plato was not acquainted with  the

modern  distinction of subject and object, and therefore he  sometimes confuses mind  and the things of

mind(Greek) and (Greek).  By (Greek) he clearly means  some conception of the intelligible and  the

intelligent; it belongs to the  class of (Greek).  Matter, being,  the Same, the eternal,for any of these  terms,

being almost vacant of  meaning, is equally suitable to express  indefinite existence,are  compared or united

with the Other or Diverse,  and out of the union or  comparison is elicited the idea of intelligence,  the 'One in

many,'  brighter than any Promethean fire (Phil.), which co  existing with  them and so forming a new

existence, is or becomes the  intelligible  world...So we may perhaps venture to paraphrase or interpret  or put

into other words the parable in which Plato has wrapped up his  conception of the creation of the world.  The

explanation may help to  fill  up with figures of speech the void of knowledge. 

The entire compound was divided by the Creator in certain  proportions and  reunited; it was then cut into two

strips, which were  bent into an inner  circle and an outer, both moving with an uniform  motion around a

centre,  the outer circle containing the fixed, the  inner the wandering stars.  The  soul of the world was diffused

everywhere from the centre to the  circumference.  To this God gave a  body, consisting at first of fire and

earth, and afterwards receiving  an addition of air and water; because solid  bodies, like the world,  are always

connected by two middle terms and not by  one.  The world  was made in the form of a globe, and all the

material  elements were  exhausted in the work of creation. 

The proportions in which the soul of the world as well as the human  soul is  divided answer to a series of

numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 8, 27,  composed of the  two Pythagorean progressions 1, 2, 4, 8 and 1, 3, 9,  27, of which

the  number 1 represents a point, 2 and 3 lines, 4 and 8,  9 and 27 the squares  and cubes respectively of 2 and

3.  This series,  of which the intervals are  afterwards filled up, probably represents  (1) the diatonic scale

according  to the Pythagoreans and Plato; (2)  the order and distances of the heavenly  bodies; and (3) may


Timaeus

Timaeus 27



Top




Page No 30


possibly  contain an allusion to the music of the  spheres, which is referred to  in the myth at the end of the

Republic.  The  meaning of the words that  'solid bodies are always connected by two middle  terms' or mean

proportionals has been much disputed.  The most received  explanation  is that of Martin, who supposes that

Plato is only speaking of  surfaces and solids compounded of prime numbers (i.e. of numbers not  made  up of

two factors, or, in other words, only measurable by unity).  The  square of any such number represents a

surface, the cube a solid.  The  squares of any two such numbers (e.g. 2 squared, 3 squared = 4,  9), have

always a single mean proportional (e.g. 4 and 9 have the  single mean 6),  whereas the cubes of primes (e.g. 3

cubed and 5 cubed)  have always two mean  proportionals (e.g. 27:45:75:125).  But to this  explanation of

Martin's it  may be objected, (1) that Plato nowhere  says that his proportion is to be  limited to prime numbers;

(2) that  the limitation of surfaces to squares is  also not to be found in his  words; nor (3) is there any evidence

to show  that the distinction of  prime from other numbers was known to him.  What  Plato chiefly intends  to

express is that a solid requires a stronger bond  than a surface;  and that the double bond which is given by two

means is  stronger than  the single bond given by one.  Having reflected on the  singular  numerical phenomena

of the existence of one mean proportional  between  two square numbers are rather perhaps only between the

two lowest  squares; and of two mean proportionals between two cubes, perhaps  again  confining his attention

to the two lowest cubes, he finds in the  latter  symbol an expression of the relation of the elements, as in the

former an  image of the combination of two surfaces.  Between fire and  earth, the two  extremes, he remarks

that there are introduced, not  one, but two elements,  air and water, which are compared to the two  mean

proportionals between two  cube numbers.  The vagueness of his  language does not allow us to determine

whether anything more than  this was intended by him. 

Leaving the further explanation of details, which the reader will  find  discussed at length in Boeckh and

Martin, we may now return to  the main  argument:  Why did God make the world?  Like man, he must  have a

purpose;  and his purpose is the diffusion of that goodness or  good which he himself  is.  The term 'goodness' is

not to be understood  in this passage as meaning  benevolence or love, in the Christian sense  of the term, but

rather law,  order, harmony, like the idea of good in  the Republic.  The ancient  mythologers, and even the

Hebrew prophets,  had spoken of the jealousy of  God; and the Greek had imagined that  there was a Nemesis

always attending  the prosperity of mortals.  But  Plato delights to think of God as the  author of order in his

works,  who, like a father, lives over again in his  children, and can never  have too much of good or friendship

among his  creatures.  Only, as  there is a certain remnant of evil inherent in matter  which he cannot  get rid of,

he detaches himself from them and leaves them  to  themselves, that he may be guiltless of their faults and

sufferings. 

Between the ideal and the sensible Plato interposes the two natures  of time  and space.  Time is conceived by

him to be only the shadow or  image of  eternity which ever is and never has been or will be, but is  described

in a  figure only as past or future.  This is one of the  great thoughts of early  philosophy, which are still as

difficult to  our minds as they were to the  early thinkers; or perhaps more  difficult, because we more distinctly

see  the consequences which are  involved in such an hypothesis.  All the  objections which may be urged

against Kant's doctrine of the ideality of  space and time at once  press upon us.  If time is unreal, then all

which is  contained in time  is unrealthe succession of human thoughts as well as  the flux of  sensations;

there is no connecting link between (Greek) and  (Greek).  Yet, on the other hand, we are conscious that

knowledge is  independent of time, that truth is not a thing of yesterday or  tomorrow,  but an 'eternal now.'  To

the 'spectator of all time and all  existence' the  universe remains at rest.  The truths of geometry and  arithmetic

in all  their combinations are always the same.  The  generations of men, like the  leaves of the forest, come and

go, but  the mathematical laws by which the  world is governed remain, and seem  as if they could never

change.  The  everpresent image of space is  transferred to timesuccession is conceived  as extension.  (We

remark  that Plato does away with the above and below in  space, as he has done  away with the absolute

existence of past and future.)  The course of  time, unless regularly marked by divisions of number,  partakes of

the  indefiniteness of the Heraclitean flux.  By such  reflections we may  conceive the Greek to have attained the

metaphysical  conception of  eternity, which to the Hebrew was gained by meditation on the  Divine  Being.  No

one saw that this objective was really a subjective, and  involved the subjectivity of all knowledge.  'Non in


Timaeus

Timaeus 28



Top




Page No 31


tempore sed cum  tempore finxit Deus mundum,' says St. Augustine, repeating a thought  derived from the

Timaeus, but apparently unconscious of the results to  which his doctrine would have led. 

The contradictions involved in the conception of time or motion,  like the  infinitesimal in space, were a source

of perplexity to the  mind of the  Greek, who was driven to find a point of view above or  beyond them.  They

had sprung up in the decline of the Eleatic  philosophy and were very  familiar to Plato, as we gather from the

Parmenides.  The consciousness of  them had led the great Eleatic  philosopher to describe the nature of God or

Being under negatives.  He sings of 'Being unbegotten and imperishable,  unmoved and  neverending, which

never was nor will be, but always is, one  and  continuous, which cannot spring from any other; for it cannot be

said  or imagined not to be.'  The idea of eternity was for a great part a  negation.  There are regions of

speculation in which the negative is  hardly  separable from the positive, and even seems to pass into it.  Not

only  Buddhism, but Greek as well as Christian philosophy, show  that it is quite  possible that the human mind

should retain an  enthusiasm for mere  negations.  In different ages and countries there  have been forms of light

in which nothing could be discerned and which  have nevertheless exercised a  lifegiving and illumining

power.  For  the higher intelligence of man seems  to require, not only something  above sense, but above

knowledge, which can  only be described as Mind  or Being or Truth or God or the unchangeable and  eternal

element, in  the expression of which all predicates fail and fall  short.  Eternity  or the eternal is not merely the

unlimited in time but the  truest of  all Being, the most real of all realities, the most certain of  all  knowledge,

which we nevertheless only see through a glass darkly.  The  passionate earnestness of Parmenides contrasts

with the vacuity of the  thought which he is revolving in his mind. 

Space is said by Plato to be the 'containing vessel or nurse of  generation.'  Reflecting on the simplest kinds of

external objects,  which  to the ancients were the four elements, he was led to a more  general notion  of a

substance, more or less like themselves, out of  which they were  fashioned.  He would not have them too

precisely  distinguished.  Thus seems  to have arisen the first dim perception of  (Greek) or matter, which has

played so great a part in the  metaphysical philosophy of Aristotle and his  followers.  But besides  the material

out of which the elements are made,  there is also a space  in which they are contained.  There arises thus a

second nature which  the senses are incapable of discerning and which can  hardly be  referred to the

intelligible class.  For it is and it is not, it  is  nowhere when filled, it is nothing when empty.  Hence it is said to

be  discerned by a kind of spurious or analogous reason, partaking so  feebly of  existence as to be hardly

perceivable, yet always  reappearing as the  containing mother or nurse of all things.  It had  not that sort of

consistency to Plato which has been given to it in  modern times by geometry  and metaphysics.  Neither of the

Greek words  by which it is described are  so purely abstract as the English word  'space' or the Latin 'spatium.'

Neither Plato nor any other Greek  would have spoken of (Greek) or (Greek)  in the same manner as we speak

of 'time' and 'space.' 

Yet space is also of a very permanent or even eternal nature; and  Plato  seems more willing to admit of the

unreality of time than of the  unreality  of space; because, as he says, all things must necessarily  exist in space.

We, on the other hand, are disposed to fancy that even  if space were  annihilated time might still survive.  He

admits indeed  that our knowledge  of space is of a dreamy kind, and is given by a  spurious reason without the

help of sense.  (Compare the hypotheses  and images of Rep.)  It is true  that it does not attain to the  clearness of

ideas.  But like them it seems  to remain, even if all the  objects contained in it are supposed to have  vanished

away.  Hence it  was natural for Plato to conceive of it as  eternal.  We must remember  further that in his

attempt to realize either  space or matter the two  abstract ideas of weight and extension, which are  familiar to

us, had  never passed before his mind. 

Thus far God, working according to an eternal pattern, out of his  goodness  has created the same, the other,

and the essence (compare the  three  principles of the Philebusthe finite, the infinite, and the  union of the

two), and out of them has formed the outer circle of the  fixed stars and  the inner circle of the planets, divided

according to  certain musical  intervals; he has also created time, the moving image  of eternity, and  space,

existing by a sort of necessity and hardly  distinguishable from  matter.  The matter out of which the world is


Timaeus

Timaeus 29



Top




Page No 32


formed is not absolutely  void, but retains in the chaos certain germs  or traces of the elements.  These Plato,

like Empedocles, supposed to  be four in numberfire, air,  earth, and water.  They were at first  mixed

together; but already in the  chaos, before God fashioned them by  form and number, the greater masses of  the

elements had an appointed  place.  Into the confusion (Greek) which  preceded Plato does not  attempt further to

penetrate.  They are called  elements, but they are  so far from being elements (Greek) or letters in the  higher

sense that  they are not even syllables or first compounds.  The real  elements are  two triangles, the rectangular

isosceles which has but one  form, and  the most beautiful of the many forms of scalene, which is half of  an

equilateral triangle.  By the combination of these triangles which  exist  in an infinite variety of sizes, the

surfaces of the four  elements are  constructed. 

That there were only five regular solids was already known to the  ancients,  and out of the surfaces which he

has formed Plato proceeds  to generate the  four first of the five.  He perhaps forgets that he is  only putting

together surfaces and has not provided for their  transformation into  solids.  The first solid is a regular

pyramid, of  which the base and sides  are formed by four equilateral or twentyfour  scalene triangles.  Each of

the four solid angles in this figure is a  little larger than the largest of  obtuse angles.  The second solid is

composed of the same triangles, which  unite as eight equilateral  triangles, and make one solid angle out of

four  plane anglessix of  these angles form a regular octahedron.  The third  solid is a regular  icosahedron,

having twenty triangular equilateral bases,  and therefore  120 rectangular scalene triangles.  The fourth regular

solid,  or cube,  is formed by the combination of four isosceles triangles into one  square and of six squares into

a cube.  The fifth regular solid, or  dodecahedron, cannot be formed by a combination of either of these

triangles, but each of its faces may be regarded as composed of thirty  triangles of another kind.  Probably

Plato notices this as the only  remaining regular polyhedron, which from its approximation to a globe,  and

possibly because, as Plutarch remarks, it is composed of 12 x 30 =  360  scalene triangles (Platon. Quaest.),

representing thus the signs  and  degrees of the Zodiac, as well as the months and days of the year,  God may  be

said to have 'used in the delineation of the universe.'  According to  Plato earth was composed of cubes, fire of

regular  pyramids, air of regular  octahedrons, water of regular icosahedrons.  The stability of the last  three

increases with the number of their  sides. 

The elements are supposed to pass into one another, but we must  remember  that these transformations are not

the transformations of  real solids, but  of imaginary geometrical figures; in other words, we  are composing

and  decomposing the faces of substances and not the  substances themselvesit  is a house of cards which we

are pulling to  pieces and putting together  again (compare however Laws).  Yet perhaps  Plato may regard these

sides or  faces as only the forms which are  impressed on preexistent matter.  It is  remarkable that he should

speak of each of these solids as a possible world  in itself, though  upon the whole he inclines to the opinion

that they form  one world and  not five.  To suppose that there is an infinite number of  worlds, as  Democritus

(Hippolyt. Ref. Haer. I.) had said, would be, as he  satirically observes, 'the characteristic of a very indefinite

and  ignorant  mind.' 

The twenty triangular faces of an icosahedron form the faces or  sides of  two regular octahedrons and of a

regular pyramid (20 = 8 x 2  + 4); and  therefore, according to Plato, a particle of water when  decomposed is

supposed to give two particles of air and one of fire.  So because an  octahedron gives the sides of two

pyramids (8 = 4 x 2),  a particle of air  is resolved into two particles of fire. 

The transformation is effected by the superior power or number of  the  conquering elements.  The manner of

the change is (1) a separation  of  portions of the elements from the masses in which they are  collected; (2) a

resolution of them into their original triangles; and  (3) a reunion of them  in new forms.  Plato himself

proposes the  question, Why does motion  continue at all when the elements are  settled in their places?  He

answers  that although the force of  attraction is continually drawing similar  elements to the same spot,  still the

revolution of the universe exercises a  condensing power, and  thrusts them again out of their natural places.

Thus  want of  uniformity, the condition of motion, is produced.  In all such  disturbances of matter there is an

alternative for the weaker element:  it  may escape to its kindred, or take the form of the  strongerbecoming


Timaeus

Timaeus 30



Top




Page No 33


denser, if it be denser, or rarer if rarer.  This  is true of fire, air, and  water, which, being composed of similar

triangles, are interchangeable;  earth, however, which has triangles  peculiar to itself, is capable of  dissolution,

but not of change.  Of  the interchangeable elements, fire, the  rarest, can only become a  denser, and water, the

densest, only a rarer:  but air may become a  denser or a rarer.  No single particle of the elements  is visible, but

only the aggregates of them are seen.  The subordinate  species depend,  not upon differences of form in the

original triangles, but  upon  differences of size.  The obvious physical phenomena from which Plato  has

gathered his views of the relations of the elements seem to be the  effect of fire upon air, water, and earth, and

the effect of water  upon  earth.  The particles are supposed by him to be in a perpetual  process of  circulation

caused by inequality.  This process of  circulation does not  admit of a vacuum, as he tells us in his strange

account of respiration. 

Of the phenomena of light and heavy he speaks afterwards, when  treating of  sensation, but they may be more

conveniently considered by  us in this  place.  They are not, he says, to be explained by 'above'  and 'below,'

which in the universal globe have no existence, but by  the attraction of  similars towards the great masses of

similar  substances; fire to fire, air  to air, water to water, earth to earth.  Plato's doctrine of attraction  implies

not only (1) the attraction of  similar elements to one another, but  also (2) of smaller bodies to  larger ones.

Had he confined himself to the  latter he would have  arrived, though, perhaps, without any further result  or

any sense of  the greatness of the discovery, at the modern doctrine of  gravitation.  He does not observe that

water has an equal tendency towards  both  water and earth.  So easily did the most obvious facts which were

inconsistent with his theories escape him. 

The general physical doctrines of the Timaeus may be summed up as  follows:  (1) Plato supposes the greater

masses of the elements to have  been already  settled in their places at the creation:  (2) they are  four in number,

and  are formed of rectangular triangles variously  combined into regular solid  figures:  (3) three of them, fire,

air,  and water, admit of transformation  into one another; the fourth,  earth, cannot be similarly transformed:

(4)  different sizes of the  same triangles form the lesser species of each  element:  (5) there is  an attraction of

like to likesmaller masses of the  same kind being  drawn towards greater:  (6) there is no void, but the

particles of  matter are ever pushing one another round and round (Greek).  Like the  atomists, Plato attributes

the differences between the elements to  differences in geometrical figures.  But he does not explain the

process by  which surfaces become solids; and he characteristically  ridicules  Democritus for not seeing that

the worlds are finite and not  infinite. 

Section 4. 

The astronomy of Plato is based on the two principles of the same  and the  other, which God combined in the

creation of the world.  The  soul, which is  compounded of the same, the other, and the essence, is  diffused

from the  centre to the circumference of the heavens.  We  speak of a soul of the  universe; but more truly

regarded, the universe  of the Timaeus is a soul,  governed by mind, and holding in solution a  residuum of

matter or evil,  which the author of the world is unable to  expel, and of which Plato cannot  tell us the origin.

The creation, in  Plato's sense, is really the creation  of order; and the first step in  giving order is the division of

the heavens  into an inner and outer  circle of the other and the same, of the divisible  and the  indivisible,

answering to the two spheres, of the planets and of  the  world beyond them, all together moving around the

earth, which is their  centre.  To us there is a difficulty in apprehending how that which is  at  rest can also be in

motion, or that which is indivisible exist in  space.  But the whole description is so ideal and imaginative, that

we  can hardly  venture to attribute to many of Plato's words in the  Timaeus any more  meaning than to his

mythical account of the heavens  in the Republic and in  the Phaedrus.  (Compare his denial of the

'blasphemous opinion' that there  are planets or wandering stars; all  alike move in circlesLaws.)  The  stars

are the habitations of the  souls of men, from which they come and to  which they return.  In  attributing to the

fixed stars only the most perfect  motionthat  which is on the same spot or circulating around the samehe

might  perhaps have said that to 'the spectator of all time and all  existence,' to borrow once more his own

grand expression, or viewed,  in the  language of Spinoza, 'sub specie aeternitatis,' they were still  at rest,  but


Timaeus

Timaeus 31



Top




Page No 34


appeared to move in order to teach men the periods of  time.  Although  absolutely in motion, they are

relatively at rest; or  we may conceive of  them as resting, while the space in which they are  contained, or the

whole  anima mundi, revolves. 

The universe revolves around a centre once in twentyfour hours,  but the  orbits of the fixed stars take a

different direction from  those of the  planets.  The outer and the inner sphere cross one  another and meet again

at a point opposite to that of their first  contact; the first moving in a  circle from left to right along the  side of a

parallelogram which is  supposed to be inscribed in it, the  second also moving in a circle along  the diagonal of

the same  parallelogram from right to left; or, in other  words, the first  describing the path of the equator, the

second, the path  of the  ecliptic.  The motion of the second is controlled by the first, and  hence the oblique line

in which the planets are supposed to move  becomes a  spiral.  The motion of the same is said to be undivided,

whereas the inner  motion is split into seven unequal orbitsthe  intervals between them being  in the ratio of

two and three, three of  either:the Sun, moving in the  opposite direction to Mercury and  Venus, but with

equal swiftness; the  remaining four, Moon, Saturn,  Mars, Jupiter, with unequal swiftness to the  former three

and to one  another.  Thus arises the following progression:  Moon 1, Sun 2,  Venus 3, Mercury 4, Mars 8,

Jupiter 9, Saturn 27.  This  series of  numbers is the compound of the two Pythagorean ratios, having the  same

intervals, though not in the same order, as the mixture which was  originally divided in forming the soul of the

world. 

Plato was struck by the phenomenon of Mercury, Venus, and the Sun  appearing  to overtake and be overtaken

by one another.  The true  reason of this,  namely, that they lie within the circle of the earth's  orbit, was

unknown  to him, and the reason which he givesthat the two  former move in an  opposite direction to the

latteris far from  explaining the appearance of  them in the heavens.  All the planets,  including the sun, are

carried round  in the daily motion of the circle  of the fixed stars, and they have a  second or oblique motion

which  gives the explanation of the different  lengths of the sun's course in  different parts of the earth.  The

fixed  stars have also two  movementsa forward movement in their orbit which is  common to the  whole

circle; and a movement on the same spot around an axis,  which  Plato calls the movement of thought about the

same.  In this latter  respect they are more perfect than the wandering stars, as Plato  himself  terms them in the

Timaeus, although in the Laws he condemns  the appellation  as blasphemous. 

The revolution of the world around earth, which is accomplished in  a single  day and night, is described as

being the most perfect or  intelligent.  Yet  Plato also speaks of an 'annus magnus' or cyclical  year, in which

periods  wonderful for their complexity are found to  coincide in a perfect number,  i.e. a number which equals

the sum of  its factors, as 6 = 1 + 2 + 3.  This,  although not literally  contradictory, is in spirit irreconcilable

with the  perfect revolution  of twentyfour hours.  The same remark may be applied to  the  complexity of the

appearances and occultations of the stars, which, if  the outer heaven is supposed to be moving around the

centre once in  twenty  four hours, must be confined to the effects produced by the  seven planets.  Plato seems

to confuse the actual observation of the  heavens with his  desire to find in them mathematical perfection.  The

same spirit is carried  yet further by him in the passage already  quoted from the Laws, in which he  affirms

their wanderings to be an  appearance only, which a little knowledge  of mathematics would enable  men to

correct. 

We have now to consider the much discussed question of the rotation  or  immobility of the earth.  Plato's

doctrine on this subject is  contained in  the following words:'The earth, which is our nurse,  compacted (OR

revolving) around the pole which is extended through the  universe, he made  to be the guardian and artificer

of night and day,  first and eldest of gods  that are in the interior of heaven'.  There  is an unfortunate doubt in

this  passage (1) about the meaning of the  word (Greek), which is translated  either 'compacted' or 'revolving,'

and is equally capable of both  explanations.  A doubt (2) may also be  raised as to whether the words  'artificer

of day and night' are  consistent with the mere passive causation  of them, produced by the  immobility of the

earth in the midst of the  circling universe.  We  must admit, further, (3) that Aristotle attributed  to Plato the

doctrine of the rotation of the earth on its axis.  On the  other hand  it has been urged that if the earth goes


Timaeus

Timaeus 32



Top




Page No 35


round with the outer  heaven  and sun in twentyfour hours, there is no way of accounting for the  alternation

of day and night; since the equal motion of the earth and  sun  would have the effect of absolute immobility.

To which it may be  replied  that Plato never says that the earth goes round with the outer  heaven and  sun;

although the whole question depends on the relation of  earth and sun,  their movements are nowhere precisely

described.  But  if we suppose, with  Mr. Grote, that the diurnal rotation of the earth  on its axis and the

revolution of the sun and outer heaven precisely  coincide, it would be  difficult to imagine that Plato was

unaware of  the consequence.  For though  he was ignorant of many things which are  familiar to us, and often

confused  in his ideas where we have become  clear, we have no right to attribute to  him a childish want of

reasoning about very simple facts, or an inability  to understand the  necessary and obvious deductions from

geometrical figures  or  movements.  Of the causes of day and night the preSocratic  philosophers, and

especially the Pythagoreans, gave various accounts,  and  therefore the question can hardly be imagined to

have escaped him.  On the  other hand it may be urged that the further step, however  simple and  obvious, is

just what Plato often seems to be ignorant of,  and that as  there is no limit to his insight, there is also no limit

to the blindness  which sometimes obscures his intelligence (compare  the construction of  solids out of

surfaces in his account of the  creation of the world, or the  attraction of similars to similars).  Further, Mr.

Grote supposes, not that  (Greek) means 'revolving,' or  that this is the sense in which Aristotle  understood the

word, but  that the rotation of the earth is necessarily  implied in its adherence  to the cosmical axis.  But (a) if,

as Mr Grote  assumes, Plato did not  see that the rotation of the earth on its axis and  of the sun and  outer

heavens around the earth in equal times was  inconsistent with  the alternation of day and night, neither need

we suppose  that he  would have seen the immobility of the earth to be inconsistent with  the rotation of the

axis.  And (b) what proof is there that the axis  of the  world revolves at all?  (c) The comparison of the two

passages  quoted by Mr  Grote (see his pamphlet on 'The Rotation of the Earth')  from Aristotle De  Coelo,

Book II (Greek) clearly shows, although this  is a matter of minor  importance, that Aristotle, as Proclus and

Simplicius supposed, understood  (Greek) in the Timaeus to mean  'revolving.'  For the second passage, in

which motion on an axis is  expressly mentioned, refers to the first, but  this would be unmeaning  unless

(Greek) in the first passage meant rotation  on an axis.  (4)  The immobility of the earth is more in accordance

with  Plato's other  writings than the opposite hypothesis.  For in the Phaedo the  earth is  described as the centre

of the world, and is not said to be in  motion.  In the Republic the pilgrims appear to be looking out from the

earth  upon the motions of the heavenly bodies; in the Phaedrus, Hestia, who  remains immovable in the house

of Zeus while the other gods go in  procession, is called the first and eldest of the gods, and is  probably the

symbol of the earth.  The silence of Plato in these and  in some other  passages (Laws) in which he might be

expected to speak  of the rotation of  the earth, is more favourable to the doctrine of  its immobility than to the

opposite.  If he had meant to say that the  earth revolves on its axis, he  would have said so in distinct words,

and have explained the relation of  its movements to those of the other  heavenly bodies.  (5) The meaning of

the words 'artificer of day and  night' is literally true according to  Plato's view.  For the  alternation of day and

night is not produced by the  motion of the  heavens alone, or by the immobility of the earth alone, but  by both

together; and that which has the inherent force or energy to remain  at  rest when all other bodies are moving,

may be truly said to act,  equally  with them.  (6) We should not lay too much stress on Aristotle  or the  writer

De Caelo having adopted the other interpretation of the  words,  although Alexander of Aphrodisias thinks that

he could not have  been  ignorant either of the doctrine of Plato or of the sense which he  intended  to give to the

word (Greek).  For the citations of Plato in  Aristotle are  frequently misinterpreted by him; and he seems

hardly  ever to have had in  his mind the connection in which they occur.  In  this instance the allusion  is very

slight, and there is no reason to  suppose that the diurnal  revolution of the heavens was present to his  mind.

Hence we need not  attribute to him the error from which we are  defending Plato. 

After weighing one against the other all these complicated  probabilities,  the final conclusion at which we

arrive is that there  is nearly as much to  be said on the one side of the question as on the  other, and that we are

not perfectly certain, whether, as Bockh and  the majority of commentators,  ancient as well as modern, are

inclined  to believe, Plato thought that the  earth was at rest in the centre of  the universe, or, as Aristotle and

Mr.  Grote suppose, that it revolved  on its axis.  Whether we assume the earth  to be stationary in the  centre of

the universe, or to revolve with the  heavens, no explanation  is given of the variation in the length of days and


Timaeus

Timaeus 33



Top




Page No 36


nights at  different times of the year.  The relations of the earth and  heavens  are so indistinct in the Timaeus

and so figurative in the Phaedo,  Phaedrus and Republic, that we must give up the hope of ascertaining  how

they were imagined by Plato, if he had any fixed or scientific  conception  of them at all. 

Section 5. 

The soul of the world is framed on the analogy of the soul of man,  and many  traces of anthropomorphism

blend with Plato's highest flights  of idealism.  The heavenly bodies are endowed with thought; the  principles

of the same  and other exist in the universe as well as in  the human mind.  The soul of  man is made out of the

remains of the  elements which had been used in  creating the soul of the world; these  remains, however, are

diluted to the  third degree; by this Plato  expresses the measure of the difference between  the soul human and

divine.  The human soul, like the cosmical, is framed  before the body,  as the mind is before the soul of

eitherthis is the  order of the  divine workand the finer parts of the body, which are more  akin to  the soul,

such as the spinal marrow, are prior to the bones and  flesh.  The brain, the containing vessel of the divine part

of the soul, is  (nearly) in the form of a globe, which is the image of the gods, who  are  the stars, and of the

universe. 

There is, however, an inconsistency in Plato's manner of conceiving  the  soul of man; he cannot get rid of the

element of necessity which  is allowed  to enter.  He does not, like Kant, attempt to vindicate for  men a

freedom  out of space and time; but he acknowledges him to be  subject to the  influence of external causes, and

leaves hardly any  place for freedom of  the will.  The lusts of men are caused by their  bodily constitution,

though  they may be increased by bad education and  bad laws, which implies that  they may be decreased by

good education  and good laws.  He appears to have  an inkling of the truth that to the  higher nature of man evil

is  involuntary.  This is mixed up with the  view which, while apparently  agreeing with it, is in reality the

opposite of it, that vice is due to  physical causes.  In the Timaeus,  as well as in the Laws, he also regards  vices

and crimes as simply  involuntary; they are diseases analogous to the  diseases of the body,  and arising out of

the same causes.  If we draw  together the opposite  poles of Plato's system, we find that, like Spinoza,  he

combines  idealism with fatalism. 

The soul of man is divided by him into three parts, answering  roughly to  the charioteer and steeds of the

Phaedrus, and to the  (Greek) of the  Republic and Nicomachean Ethics.  First, there is the  immortal nature of

which the brain is the seat, and which is akin to  the soul of the universe.  This alone thinks and knows and is

the ruler  of the whole.  Secondly, there  is the higher mortal soul which, though  liable to perturbations of her

own,  takes the side of reason against  the lower appetites.  The seat of this is  the heart, in which courage,

anger, and all the nobler affections are  supposed to reside.  There  the veins all meet; it is their centre or house

of guard whence they  carry the orders of the thinking being to the  extremities of his  kingdom.  There is also a

third or appetitive soul,  which receives the  commands of the immortal part, not immediately but  mediately,

through  the liver, which reflects on its surface the admonitions  and threats  of the reason. 

The liver is imagined by Plato to be a smooth and bright substance,  having  a store of sweetness and also of

bitterness, which reason  freely uses in  the execution of her mandates.  In this region, as  ancient superstition

told, were to be found intimations of the future.  But Plato is careful to  observe that although such knowledge

is given  to the inferior parts of man,  it requires to be interpreted by the  superior.  Reason, and not enthusiasm,

is the true guide of man; he is  only inspired when he is demented by some  distemper or possession.  The

ancient saying, that 'only a man in his  senses can judge of his  own actions,' is approved by modern

philosophy too.  The same irony  which appears in Plato's remark, that 'the men of old time  must surely  have

known the gods who were their ancestors, and we should  believe  them as custom requires,' is also manifest in

his account of  divination. 

The appetitive soul is seated in the belly, and there imprisoned  like a  wild beast, far away from the council

chamber, as Plato  graphically calls  the head, in order that the animal passions may not  interfere with the


Timaeus

Timaeus 34



Top




Page No 37


deliberations of reason.  Though the soul is said  by him to be prior to the  body, yet we cannot help seeing that

it is  constructed on the model of the  bodythe threefold division into the  rational, passionate, and appetitive

corresponding to the head, heart  and belly.  The human soul differs from  the soul of the world in this  respect,

that it is enveloped and finds its  expression in matter,  whereas the soul of the world is not only enveloped  or

diffused in  matter, but is the element in which matter moves.  The  breath of man  is within him, but the air or

aether of heaven is the element  which  surrounds him and all things. 

Pleasure and pain are attributed in the Timaeus to the suddenness  of our  sensationsthe first being a sudden

restoration, the second a  sudden  violation, of nature (Phileb.).  The sensations become  conscious to us when

they are exceptional.  Sight is not attended  either by pleasure or pain,  but hunger and the appeasing of hunger

are  pleasant and painful because  they are extraordinary. 

Section 6. 

I shall not attempt to connect the physiological speculations of  Plato  either with ancient or modern medicine.

What light I can throw  upon them  will be derived from the comparison of them with his general  system. 

There is no principle so apparent in the physics of the Timaeus, or  in  ancient physics generally, as that of

continuity.  The world is  conceived  of as a whole, and the elements are formed into and out of  one another;

the  varieties of substances and processes are hardly  known or noticed.  And in  a similar manner the human

body is conceived  of as a whole, and the  different substances of which, to a superficial  observer, it appears to

be  composedthe blood, flesh, sinewslike  the elements out of which they are  formed, are supposed to

pass into  one another in regular order, while the  infinite complexity of the  human frame remains unobserved.

And diseases  arise from the opposite  processwhen the natural proportions of the four  elements are

disturbed, and the secondary substances which are formed out  of them,  namely, blood, flesh, sinews, are

generated in an inverse order. 

Plato found heat and air within the human frame, and the blood  circulating  in every part.  He assumes in

language almost  unintelligible to us that a  network of fire and air envelopes the  greater part of the body.  This

outer  net contains two lesser nets,  one corresponding to the stomach, the other  to the lungs; and the  entrance

to the latter is forked or divided into two  passages which  lead to the nostrils and to the mouth.  In the process

of  respiration  the external net is said to find a way in and out of the pores  of the  skin:  while the interior of it

and the lesser nets move alternately  into each other.  The whole description is figurative, as Plato  himself

implies when he speaks of a 'fountain of fire which we compare  to the  network of a creel.'  He really means by

this what we should  describe as a  state of heat or temperature in the interior of the  body.  The 'fountain of  fire'

or heat is also in a figure the  circulation of the blood.  The  passage is partly imagination, partly  fact. 

He has a singular theory of respiration for which he accounts  solely by the  movement of the air in and out of

the body; he does not  attribute any part  of the process to the action of the body itself.  The air has a double

ingress and a double exit, through the mouth or  nostrils, and through the  skin.  When exhaled through the

mouth or  nostrils, it leaves a vacuum which  is filled up by other air finding a  way in through the pores, this

air  being thrust out of its place by  the exhalation from the mouth and  nostrils.  There is also a  corresponding

process of inhalation through the  mouth or nostrils, and  of exhalation through the pores.  The inhalation

through the pores  appears to take place nearly at the same time as the  exhalation  through the mouth; and

conversely.  The internal fire is in  either  case the propelling cause outwardsthe inhaled air, when heated by

it, having a natural tendency to move out of the body to the place of  fire;  while the impossibility of a vacuum

is the propelling cause  inwards. 

Thus we see that this singular theory is dependent on two  principles  largely employed by Plato in explaining

the operations of  nature, the  impossibility of a vacuum and the attraction of like to  like.  To these  there has to

be added a third principle, which is the  condition of the  action of the other two,the interpenetration of


Timaeus

Timaeus 35



Top




Page No 38


particles in proportion  to their density or rarity.  It is this which  enables fire and air to  permeate the flesh. 

Plato's account of digestion and the circulation of the blood is  closely  connected with his theory of

respiration.  Digestion is  supposed to be  effected by the action of the internal fire, which in  the process of

respiration moves into the stomach and minces the food.  As the fire  returns to its place, it takes with it the

minced food or  blood; and in  this way the veins are replenished.  Plato does not  enquire how the blood  is

separated from the faeces. 

Of the anatomy and functions of the body he knew very little,e.g.  of the  uses of the nerves in conveying

motion and sensation, which he  supposed to  be communicated by the bones and veins; he was also  ignorant

of the  distinction between veins and arteries;the latter  term he applies to the  vessels which conduct air

from the mouth to the  lungs;he supposes the  lung to be hollow and bloodless; the spinal  marrow he

conceives to be the  seed of generation; he confuses the  parts of the body with the states of  the bodythe

network of fire and  air is spoken of as a bodily organ; he  has absolutely no idea of the  phenomena of

respiration, which he attributes  to a law of equalization  in nature, the air which is breathed out  displacing

other air which  finds a way in; he is wholly unacquainted with  the process of  digestion.  Except the general

divisions into the spleen,  the liver,  the belly, and the lungs, and the obvious distinctions of flesh,  bones, and

the limbs of the body, we find nothing that reminds us of  anatomical facts.  But we find much which is

derived from his theory  of the  universe, and transferred to man, as there is much also in his  theory of  the

universe which is suggested by man.  The microcosm of  the human body is  the lesser image of the

macrocosm.  The courses of  the same and the other  affect both; they are made of the same elements  and

therefore in the same  proportions.  Both are intelligent natures  endued with the power of self  motion, and the

same equipoise is  maintained in both.  The animal is a sort  of 'world' to the particles  of the blood which

circulate in it.  All the  four elements entered  into the original composition of the human frame; the  bone was

formed  out of smooth earth; liquids of various kinds pass to and  fro; the  network of fire and air irrigates the

veins.  Infancy and  childhood is  the chaos or first turbid flux of sense prior to the  establishment of  order; the

intervals of time which may be observed in some  intermittent fevers correspond to the density of the

elements.  The  spinal  marrow, including the brain, is formed out of the finest sorts  of  triangles, and is the

connecting link between body and mind.  Health is  only to be preserved by imitating the motions of the world

in space, which  is the mother and nurse of generation.  The work of  digestion is carried on  by the superior

sharpness of the triangles  forming the substances of the  human body to those which are introduced  into it in

the shape of food.  The  freshest and acutest forms of  triangles are those that are found in  children, but they

become more  obtuse with advancing years; and when they  finally wear out and fall  to pieces, old age and

death supervene. 

As in the Republic, Plato is still the enemy of the purgative  treatment of  physicians, which, except in extreme

cases, no man of  sense will ever  adopt.  For, as he adds, with an insight into the  truth, 'every disease is  akin to

the nature of the living being and is  only irritated by  stimulants.'  He is of opinion that nature should be  left to

herself, and  is inclined to think that physicians are in vain  (Lawswhere he says that  warm baths would be

more beneficial to the  limbs of the aged rustic than  the prescriptions of a not overwise  doctor).  If he seems

to be extreme in  his condemnation of medicine  and to rely too much on diet and exercise, he  might appeal to

nearly  all the best physicians of our own age in support of  his opinions, who  often speak to their patients of

the worthlessness of  drugs.  For we  ourselves are sceptical about medicine, and very unwilling  to submit  to

the purgative treatment of physicians.  May we not claim for  Plato  an anticipation of modern ideas as about

some questions of astronomy  and physics, so also about medicine?  As in the Charmides he tells us  that  the

body cannot be cured without the soul, so in the Timaeus he  strongly  asserts the sympathy of soul and body;

any defect of either  is the occasion  of the greatest discord and disproportion in the  other.  Here too may be a

presentiment that in the medicine of the  future the interdependence of mind  and body will be more fully

recognized, and that the influence of the one  over the other may be  exerted in a manner which is not now

thought  possible. 


Timaeus

Timaeus 36



Top




Page No 39


Section 7. 

In Plato's explanation of sensation we are struck by the fact that  he has  not the same distinct conception of

organs of sense which is  familiar to  ourselves.  The senses are not instruments, but rather  passages, through

which external objects strike upon the mind.  The  eye is the aperture  through which the stream of vision

passes, the ear  is the aperture through  which the vibrations of sound pass.  But that  the complex structure of

the  eye or the ear is in any sense the cause  of sight and hearing he seems  hardly to be aware. 

The process of sight is the most complicated (Rep.), and consists  of three  elementsthe light which is

supposed to reside within the  eye, the light  of the sun, and the light emitted from external  objects.  When the

light of  the eye meets the light of the sun, and  both together meet the light  issuing from an external object,

this is  the simple act of sight.  When the  particles of light which proceed  from the object are exactly equal to

the  particles of the visual ray  which meet them from within, then the body is  transparent.  If they  are larger

and contract the visual ray, a black  colour is produced; if  they are smaller and dilate it, a white.  Other

phenomena are produced  by the variety and motion of light.  A sudden flash  of fire at once  elicits light and

moisture from the eye, and causes a  bright colour.  A more subdued light, on mingling with the moisture of

the  eye,  produces a red colour.  Out of these elements all other colours are  derived.  All of them are

combinations of bright and red with white  and  black.  Plato himself tells us that he does not know in what

proportions  they combine, and he is of opinion that such knowledge is  granted to the  gods only.  To have seen

the affinity of them to each  other and their  connection with light, is not a bad basis for a theory  of colours.

We must  remember that they were not distinctly defined to  his, as they are to our  eyes; he saw them, not as

they are divided in  the prism, or artificially  manufactured for the painter's use, but as  they exist in nature,

blended  and confused with one another. 

We can hardly agree with him when he tells us that smells do not  admit of  kinds.  He seems to think that no

definite qualities can  attach to bodies  which are in a state of transition or evaporation; he  also makes the

subtle  observation that smells must be denser than air,  though thinner than water,  because when there is an

obstruction to the  breathing, air can penetrate,  but not smell. 

The affections peculiar to the tongue are of various kinds, and,  like many  other affections, are caused by

contraction and dilation.  Some of them are  produced by rough, others by abstergent, others by  inflammatory

substances,these act upon the testing instruments of  the tongue, and  produce a more or less disagreeable

sensation, while  other particles  congenial to the tongue soften and harmonize them.  The instruments of  taste

reach from the tongue to the heart.  Plato  has a lively sense of the  manner in which sensation and motion are

communicated from one part of the  body to the other, though he  confuses the affections with the organs.

Hearing is a blow which  passes through the ear and ends in the region of  the liver, being  transmitted by

means of the air, the brain, and the blood  to the soul.  The swifter sound is acute, the sound which moves

slowly is  grave.  A  great body of sound is loud, the opposite is low.  Discord is  produced  by the swifter and

slower motions of two sounds, and is converted  into  harmony when the swifter motions begin to pause and

are overtaken by  the slower. 

The general phenomena of sensation are partly internal, but the  more  violent are caused by conflict with

external objects.  Proceeding  by a  method of superficial observation, Plato remarks that the more  sensitive

parts of the human frame are those which are least covered  by flesh, as is  the case with the head and the

elbows.  Man, if his  head had been covered  with a thicker pulp of flesh, might have been a  longerlived

animal than he  is, but could not have had as quick  perceptions.  On the other hand, the  tongue is one of the

most  sensitive of organs; but then this is made, not  to be a covering to  the bones which contain the marrow or

source of life,  but with an  express purpose, and in a separate mass. 

Section 8. 


Timaeus

Timaeus 37



Top




Page No 40


We have now to consider how far in any of these speculations Plato  approximated to the discoveries of

modern science.  The modern  physical  philosopher is apt to dwell exclusively on the absurdities of  ancient

ideas  about science, on the haphazard fancies and a priori  assumptions of  ancient teachers, on their confusion

of facts and  ideas, on their  inconsistency and blindness to the most obvious  phenomena.  He measures  them

not by what preceded them, but by what  has followed them.  He does not  consider that ancient physical

philosophy was not a free enquiry, but a  growth, in which the mind was  passive rather than active, and was

incapable  of resisting the  impressions which flowed in upon it.  He hardly allows to  the notions  of the ancients

the merit of being the steppingstones by which  he has  himself risen to a higher knowledge.  He never

reflects, how great a  thing it was to have formed a conception, however imperfect, either of  the  human frame

as a whole, or of the world as a whole.  According to  the view  taken in these volumes the errors of ancient

physicists were  not separable  from the intellectual conditions under which they lived.  Their genius was  their

own; and they were not the rash and hasty  generalizers which, since  the days of Bacon, we have been apt to

suppose them.  The thoughts of men  widened to receive experience; at  first they seemed to know all things as

in a dream:  after a while  they look at them closely and hold them in their  hands.  They begin to  arrange them

in classes and to connect causes with  effects.  General  notions are necessary to the apprehension of particular

facts, the  metaphysical to the physical.  Before men can observe the world,  they  must be able to conceive it. 

To do justice to the subject, we should consider the physical  philosophy of  the ancients as a whole; we should

remember, (1) that  the nebular theory  was the received belief of several of the early  physicists; (2) that the

development of animals out of fishes who came  to land, and of man out of  the animals, was held by

Anaximander in the  sixth century before Christ  (Plut. Symp. Quaest; Plac. Phil.); (3)  that even by Philolaus

and the early  Pythagoreans, the earth was held  to be a body like the other stars  revolving in space around the

sun or  a central fire; (4) that the  beginnings of chemistry are discernible  in the 'similar particles' of

Anaxagoras.  Also they knew or thought  (5) that there was a sex in plants  as well as in animals; (6) they  were

aware that musical notes depended on  the relative length or  tension of the strings from which they were

emitted,  and were measured  by ratios of number; (7) that mathematical laws pervaded  the world;  and even

qualitative differences were supposed to have their  origin in  number and figure; (8) the annihilation of matter

was denied by  several of them, and the seeming disappearance of it held to be a  transformation only.  For,

although one of these discoveries might  have  been supposed to be a happy guess, taken together they seem to

imply a  great advance and almost maturity of natural knowledge. 

We should also remember, when we attribute to the ancients hasty  generalizations and delusions of language,

that physical philosophy  and  metaphysical too have been guilty of similar fallacies in quite  recent  times.  We

by no means distinguish clearly between mind and  body, between  ideas and facts.  Have not many discussions

arisen about  the Atomic theory  in which a point has been confused with a material  atom?  Have not the

natures of things been explained by imaginary  entities, such as life or  phlogiston, which exist in the mind

only?  Has not disease been regarded,  like sin, sometimes as a negative and  necessary, sometimes as a positive

or  malignant principle?  The  'idols' of Bacon are nearly as common now as  ever; they are inherent  in the

human mind, and when they have the most  complete dominion over  us, we are least able to perceive them.

We  recognize them in the  ancients, but we fail to see them in ourselves. 

Such reflections, although this is not the place in which to dwell  upon  them at length, lead us to take a

favourable view of the  speculations of  the Timaeus.  We should consider not how much Plato  actually knew,

but how  far he has contributed to the general ideas of  physics, or supplied the  notions which, whether true or

false, have  stimulated the minds of later  generations in the path of discovery.  Some of them may seem

oldfashioned,  but may nevertheless have had a  great influence in promoting system and  assisting enquiry,

while in  others we hear the latest word of physical or  metaphysical philosophy.  There is also an intermediate

class, in which  Plato falls short of  the truths of modern science, though he is not wholly  unacquainted  with

them.  (1) To the first class belongs the teleological  theory of  creation.  Whether all things in the world can be

explained as  the  result of natural laws, or whether we must not admit of tendencies and  marks of design also,

has been a question much disputed of late years.  Even if all phenomena are the result of natural forces, we


Timaeus

Timaeus 38



Top




Page No 41


must admit  that  there are many things in heaven and earth which are as well  expressed under  the image of

mind or design as under any other.  At  any rate, the language  of Plato has been the language of natural

theology down to our own time,  nor can any description of the world  wholly dispense with it.  The notion  of

first and second or  cooperative causes, which originally appears in the  Timaeus, has  likewise survived to

our own day, and has been a great peace  maker  between theology and science.  Plato also approaches very

near to our  doctrine of the primary and secondary qualities of matter.  (2)  Another  popular notion which is

found in the Timaeus, is the  feebleness of the  human intellect'God knows the original qualities  of things;

man can only  hope to attain to probability.'  We speak in  almost the same words of human  intelligence, but

not in the same  manner of the uncertainty of our  knowledge of nature.  The reason is  that the latter is assured

to us by  experiment, and is not contrasted  with the certainty of ideal or  mathematical knowledge.  But the

ancient philosopher never experimented:  in the Timaeus Plato seems to  have thought that there would be

impiety in  making the attempt; he,  for example, who tried experiments in colours would  'forget the  difference

of the human and divine natures.'  Their  indefiniteness is  probably the reason why he singles them out, as

especially incapable  of being tested by experiment.  (Compare the saying of  AnaxagorasSext. Pyrrh.that

since snow is made of water and water  is  black, snow ought to be black.) 

The greatest 'divination' of the ancients was the supremacy which  they  assigned to mathematics in all the

realms of nature; for in all  of them  there is a foundation of mechanics.  Even physiology partakes  of figure

and  number; and Plato is not wrong in attributing them to  the human frame, but  in the omission to observe

how little could be  explained by them.  Thus we  may remark in passing that the most  fanciful of ancient

philosophies is  also the most nearly verified in  fact.  The fortunate guess that the world  is a sum of numbers

and  figures has been the most fruitful of  anticipations.  The 'diatonic'  scale of the Pythagoreans and Plato

suggested to Kepler that the  secret of the distances of the planets from  one another was to be  found in

mathematical proportions.  The doctrine that  the heavenly  bodies all move in a circle is known by us to be

erroneous;  but  without such an error how could the human mind have comprehended the  heavens?

Astronomy, even in modern times, has made far greater  progress by  the high a priori road than could have

been attained by  any other.  Yet,  strictly speakingand the remark applies to ancient  physics generally  this

high a priori road was based upon a  posteriori grounds.  For there  were no facts of which the ancients  were so

well assured by experience as  facts of number.  Having  observed that they held good in a few instances,  they

applied them  everywhere; and in the complexity, of which they were  capable, found  the explanation of the

equally complex phenomena of the  universe.  They seemed to see them in the least things as well as in the

greatest; in atoms, as well as in suns and stars; in the human body as  well  as in external nature.  And now a

favourite speculation of modern  chemistry  is the explanation of qualitative difference by  quantitative, which

is at  present verified to a certain extent and may  hereafter be of far more  universal application.  What is this

but the  atoms of Democritus and the  triangles of Plato?  The ancients should  not be wholly deprived of the

credit of their guesses because they  were unable to prove them.  May they  not have had, like the animals,  an

instinct of something more than they  knew? 

Besides general notions we seem to find in the Timaeus some more  precise  approximations to the discoveries

of modern physical science.  First, the  doctrine of equipoise.  Plato affirms, almost in so many  words, that

nature  abhors a vacuum.  Whenever a particle is displaced,  the rest push and  thrust one another until equality

is restored.  We  must remember that these  ideas were not derived from any definite  experiment, but were the

original  reflections of man, fresh from the  first observation of nature.  The latest  word of modern philosophy

is  continuity and development, but to Plato this  is the beginning and  foundation of science; there is nothing

that he is so  strongly  persuaded of as that the world is one, and that all the various  existences which are

contained in it are only the transformations of  the  same soul of the world acting on the same matter.  He

would have  readily  admitted that out of the protoplasm all things were formed by  the gradual  process of

creation; but he would have insisted that mind  and intelligence  not meaning by this, however, a conscious

mind or  personwere prior to  them, and could alone have created them.  Into  the workings of this eternal

mind or intelligence he does not enter  further; nor would there have been  any use in attempting to  investigate

the things which no eye has seen nor  any human language  can express. 


Timaeus

Timaeus 39



Top




Page No 42


Lastly, there remain two points in which he seems to touch great  discoveries of modern timesthe law of

gravitation, and the  circulation of  the blood. 

(1) The law of gravitation, according to Plato, is a law, not only  of the  attraction of lesser bodies to larger

ones, but of similar  bodies to  similar, having a magnetic power as well as a principle of  gravitation.  He

observed that earth, water, and air had settled down  to their places, and  he imagined fire or the exterior aether

to have a  place beyond air.  When  air seemed to go upwards and fire to pierce  through airwhen water and

earth fell downward, they were seeking  their native elements.  He did not  remark that his own explanation did

not suit all phenomena; and the simpler  explanation, which assigns to  bodies degrees of heaviness and

lightness  proportioned to the mass and  distance of the bodies which attract them,  never occurred to him.  Yet

the affinities of similar substances have some  effect upon the  composition of the world, and of this Plato may

be thought  to have had  an anticipation.  He may be described as confusing the  attraction of  gravitation with

the attraction of cohesion.  The influence  of such  affinities and the chemical action of one body upon another

in long  periods of time have become a recognized principle of geology. 

(2) Plato is perfectly awareand he could hardly be ignorantthat  blood  is a fluid in constant motion.  He

also knew that blood is  partly a solid  substance consisting of several elements, which, as he  might have

observed  in the use of 'cuppingglasses', decompose and  die, when no longer in  motion.  But the specific

discovery that the  blood flows out on one side of  the heart through the arteries and  returns through the veins

on the other,  which is commonly called the  circulation of the blood, was absolutely  unknown to him. 

A further study of the Timaeus suggests some afterthoughts which  may be  conveniently brought together in

this place.  The topics which  I propose  briefly to reconsider are (a) the relation of the Timaeus to  the other

dialogues of Plato and to the previous philosophy; (b) the  nature of God  and of creation (c) the morality of

the Timaeus: 

(a) The Timaeus is more imaginative and less scientific than any  other of  the Platonic dialogues.  It is

conjectural astronomy,  conjectural natural  philosophy, conjectural medicine.  The writer  himself is constantly

repeating that he is speaking what is probable  only.  The dialogue is put  into the mouth of Timaeus, a

Pythagorean  philosopher, and therefore here,  as in the Parmenides, we are in doubt  how far Plato is

expressing his own  sentiments.  Hence the connexion  with the other dialogues is comparatively  slight.  We

may fill up the  lacunae of the Timaeus by the help of the  Republic or Phaedrus:  we  may identify the same and

other with the (Greek)  of the Philebus.  We  may find in the Laws or in the Statesman parallels  with the

account of  creation and of the first origin of man.  It would be  possible to  frame a scheme in which all these

various elements might have a  place.  But such a mode of proceeding would be unsatisfactory, because we

have no reason to suppose that Plato intended his scattered thoughts  to be  collected in a system.  There is a

common spirit in his  writings, and there  are certain general principles, such as the  opposition of the sensible

and  intellectual, and the priority of mind,  which run through all of them; but  he has no definite forms of

words  in which he consistently expresses  himself.  While the determinations  of human thought are in process

of  creation he is necessarily  tentative and uncertain.  And there is least of  definiteness, whenever  either in

describing the beginning or the end of the  world, he has  recourse to myths.  These are not the fixed modes in

which  spiritual  truths are revealed to him, but the efforts of imagination, by  which  at different times and in

various manners he seeks to embody his  conceptions.  The clouds of mythology are still resting upon him, and

he  has not yet pierced 'to the heaven of the fixed stars' which is  beyond  them.  It is safer then to admit the

inconsistencies of the  Timaeus, or to  endeavour to fill up what is wanting from our own  imagination, inspired

by  a study of the dialogue, than to refer to  other Platonic writings,and  still less should we refer to the

successors of Plato,for the elucidation  of it. 

More light is thrown upon the Timaeus by a comparison of the  previous  philosophies.  For the physical

science of the ancients was  traditional,  descending through many generations of Ionian and  Pythagorean

philosophers.  Plato does not look out upon the heavens and  describe what he sees in them,  but he builds upon


Timaeus

Timaeus 40



Top




Page No 43


the foundations of  others, adding something out of the  'depths of his own  selfconsciousness.'  Socrates had

already spoken of God  the creator,  who made all things for the best.  While he ridiculed the  superficial

explanations of phenomena which were current in his age, he  recognised  the marks both of benevolence and

of design in the frame of man  and in  the world.  The apparatus of winds and waters is contemptuously  rejected

by him in the Phaedo, but he thinks that there is a power  greater  than that of any Atlas in the 'Best' (Phaedo;

Arist. Met.).  Plato,  following his master, affirms this principle of the best, but  he  acknowledges that the best

is limited by the conditions of matter.  In the  generation before Socrates, Anaxagoras had brought together

'Chaos' and  'Mind'; and these are connected by Plato in the Timaeus,  but in accordance  with his own mode of

thinking he has interposed  between them the idea or  pattern according to which mind worked.  The  circular

impulse (Greek) of  the one philosopher answers to the  circular movement (Greek) of the other.  But unlike

Anaxagoras, Plato  made the sun and stars living beings and not  masses of earth or metal.  The Pythagoreans

again had framed a world out of  numbers, which they  constructed into figures.  Plato adopted their

speculations and  improved upon them by a more exact knowledge of geometry.  The Atomists  too made the

world, if not out of geometrical figures, at  least out of  different forms of atoms, and these atoms resembled

the  triangles of  Plato in being too small to be visible.  But though the  physiology of  the Timaeus is partly

borrowed from them, they are either  ignored by  Plato or referred to with a secret contempt and dislike.  He

looks  with more favour on the Pythagoreans, whose intervals of number  applied to the distances of the

planets reappear in the Timaeus.  It  is  probable that among the Pythagoreans living in the fourth century  B.C.,

there were already some who, like Plato, made the earth their  centre.  Whether he obtained his circles of the

Same and Other from any  previous  thinker is uncertain.  The four elements are taken from  Empedocles; the

interstices of the Timaeus may also be compared with  his (Greek).  The  passage of one element into another is

common to  Heracleitus and several of  the Ionian philosophers.  So much of a  syncretist is Plato, though not

after the manner of the Neoplatonists.  For the elements which he borrows  from others are fused and

transformed by his own genius.  On the other hand  we find fewer traces  in Plato of early Ionic or Eleatic

speculation.  He  does not imagine  the world of sense to be made up of opposites or to be in  a perpetual  flux,

but to vary within certain limits which are controlled by  what  he calls the principle of the same.  Unlike the

Eleatics, who  relegated the world to the sphere of notbeing, he admits creation to  have  an existence which is

real and even eternal, although dependent  on the will  of the creator.  Instead of maintaining the doctrine that

the void has a  necessary place in the existence of the world, he  rather affirms the modern  thesis that nature

abhors a vacuum, as in  the Sophist he also denies the  reality of notbeing (Aristot.  Metaph.).  But though in

these respects he  differs from them, he is  deeply penetrated by the spirit of their  philosophy; he differs from

them with reluctance, and gladly recognizes the  'generous depth' of  Parmenides (Theaet.). 

There is a similarity between the Timaeus and the fragments of  Philolaus,  which by some has been thought to

be so great as to create  a suspicion that  they are derived from it.  Philolaus is known to us  from the Phaedo of

Plato as a Pythagorean philosopher residing at  Thebes in the latter half of  the fifth century B.C., after the

dispersion of the original Pythagorean  society.  He was the teacher of  Simmias and Cebes, who became

disciples of  Socrates.  We have hardly  any other information about him.  The story that  Plato had purchased

three books of his writings from a relation is not  worth repeating; it  is only a fanciful way in which an ancient

biographer  dresses up the  fact that there was supposed to be a resemblance between the  two  writers.  Similar

gossiping stories are told about the sources of the  Republic and the Phaedo.  That there really existed in

antiquity a  work  passing under the name of Philolaus there can be no doubt.  Fragments of  this work are

preserved to us, chiefly in Stobaeus, a  few in Boethius and  other writers.  They remind us of the Timaeus, as

well as of the Phaedrus  and Philebus.  When the writer says (Stob.  Eclog.) that all things are  either finite

(definite) or infinite  (indefinite), or a union of the two,  and that this antithesis and  synthesis pervades all art

and nature, we are  reminded of the  Philebus.  When he calls the centre of the world (Greek),  we have a

parallel to the Phaedrus.  His distinction between the world of  order,  to which the sun and moon and the stars

belong, and the world of  disorder, which lies in the region between the moon and the earth,  approximates to

Plato's sphere of the Same and of the Other.  Like  Plato  (Tim.), he denied the above and below in space, and

said that  all things  were the same in relation to a centre.  He speaks also of  the world as one  and

indestructible:  'for neither from within nor  from without does it  admit of destruction' (Tim).  He mentions ten


Timaeus

Timaeus 41



Top




Page No 44


heavenly bodies, including  the sun and moon, the earth and the  counterearth (Greek), and in the midst  of

them all he places the  central fire, around which they are movingthis  is hidden from the  earth by the

counterearth.  Of neither is there any  trace in Plato,  who makes the earth the centre of his system.  Philolaus

magnifies the  virtues of particular numbers, especially of the number 10  (Stob.  Eclog.), and descants upon

odd and even numbers, after the manner of  the later Pythagoreans.  It is worthy of remark that these mystical

fancies  are nowhere to be found in the writings of Plato, although the  importance  of number as a form and

also an instrument of thought is  ever present to  his mind.  Both Philolaus and Plato agree in making  the world

move in  certain numerical ratios according to a musical  scale:  though Bockh is of  opinion that the two scales,

of Philolaus  and of the Timaeus, do not  correspond...We appear not to be  sufficiently acquainted with the

early  Pythagoreans to know how far  the statements contained in these fragments  corresponded with their

doctrines; and we therefore cannot pronounce,  either in favour of the  genuineness of the fragments, with

Bockh and  Zeller, or, with  Valentine Rose and Schaarschmidt, against them.  But it is  clear that  they throw

but little light upon the Timaeus, and that their  resemblance to it has been exaggerated. 

That there is a degree of confusion and indistinctness in Plato's  account  both of man and of the universe has

been already acknowledged.  We cannot  tell (nor could Plato himself have told) where the figure  or myth ends

and  the philosophical truth begins; we cannot explain  (nor could Plato himself  have explained to us) the

relation of the  ideas to appearance, of which one  is the copy of the other, and yet of  all things in the world

they are the  most opposed and unlike.  This  opposition is presented to us in many forms,  as the antithesis of

the  one and many, of the finite and infinite, of the  intelligible and  sensible, of the unchangeable and the

changing, of the  indivisible and  the divisible, of the fixed stars and the planets, of the  creative  mind and the

primeval chaos.  These pairs of opposites are so many  aspects of the great opposition between ideas and

phenomenathey  easily  pass into one another; and sometimes the two members of the  relation differ  in

kind, sometimes only in degree.  As in Aristotle's  matter and form the  connexion between them is really

inseparable; for  if we attempt to separate  them they become devoid of content and  therefore

indistinguishable; there  is no difference between the idea  of which nothing can be predicated, and  the chaos

or matter which has  no perceptible qualitiesbetween Being in  the abstract and Nothing.  Yet we are

frequently told that the one class of  them is the reality  and the other appearance; and one is often spoken of as

the double or  reflection of the other.  For Plato never clearly saw that  both  elements had an equal place in

mind and in nature; and hence,  especially when we argue from isolated passages in his writings, or  attempt  to

draw what appear to us to be the natural inferences from  them, we are  full of perplexity.  There is a similar

confusion about  necessity and free  will, and about the state of the soul after death.  Also he sometimes

supposes that God is immanent in the world,  sometimes that he is  transcendent.  And having no distinction of

objective and subjective, he  passes imperceptibly from one to the  other; from intelligence to soul, from

eternity to time.  These  contradictions may be softened or concealed by a  judicious use of  language, but they

cannot be wholly got rid of.  That an  age of  intellectual transition must also be one of inconsistency; that the

creative is opposed to the critical or defining habit of mind or time,  has  been often repeated by us.  But, as

Plato would say, 'there is no  harm in  repeating twice or thrice' (Laws) what is important for the  understanding

of a great author. 

It has not, however, been observed, that the confusion partly  arises out of  the elements of opposing

philosophies which are  preserved in him.  He holds  these in solution, he brings them into  relation with one

another, but he  does not perfectly harmonize them.  They are part of his own mind, and he  is incapable of

placing himself  outside of them and criticizing them.  They  grow as he grows; they are  a kind of composition

with which his own  philosophy is overlaid.  In  early life he fancies that he has mastered  them:  but he is also

mastered by them; and in language (Sophist) which may  be compared with  the hesitating tone of the

Timaeus, he confesses in his  later years  that they are full of obscurity to him.  He attributes new  meanings to

the words of Parmenides and Heracleitus; but at times the old  Eleatic  philosophy appears to go beyond him;

then the world of phenomena  disappears, but the doctrine of ideas is also reduced to nothingness.  All  of them

are nearer to one another than they themselves supposed,  and nearer  to him than he supposed.  All of them are

antagonistic to  sense and have an  affinity to number and measure and a presentiment of  ideas.  Even in Plato


Timaeus

Timaeus 42



Top




Page No 45


they still retain their contentious or  controversial character, which was  developed by the growth of  dialectic.

He is never able to reconcile the  first causes of the  preSocratic philosophers with the final causes of

Socrates himself.  There is no intelligible account of the relation of  numbers to the  universal ideas, or of

universals to the idea of good.  He  found them  all three, in the Pythagorean philosophy and in the teaching of

Socrates and of the Megarians respectively; and, because they all  furnished  modes of explaining and

arranging phenomena, he is unwilling  to give up any  of them, though he is unable to unite them in a

consistent whole. 

Lastly, Plato, though an idealist philosopher, is Greek and not  Oriental in  spirit and feeling.  He is no mystic

or ascetic; he is not  seeking in vain  to get rid of matter or to find absorption in the  divine nature, or in the

Soul of the universe.  And therefore we are  not surprised to find that his  philosophy in the Timaeus returns at

last to a worship of the heavens, and  that to him, as to other Greeks,  nature, though containing a remnant of

evil, is still glorious and  divine.  He takes away or drops the veil of  mythology, and presents  her to us in what

appears to him to be the form  fairer and truer  farof mathematical figures.  It is this element in the

Timaeus, no  less than its affinity to certain Pythagorean speculations,  which  gives it a character not wholly in

accordance with the other  dialogues  of Plato. 

(b) The Timaeus contains an assertion perhaps more distinct than is  found  in any of the other dialogues (Rep.;

Laws) of the goodness of  God.  'He was  good himself, and he fashioned the good everywhere.'  He  was not 'a

jealous  God,' and therefore he desired that all other  things should be equally  good.  He is the IDEA of good

who has now  become a person, and speaks and  is spoken of as God.  Yet his  personality seems to appear only

in the act  of creation.  In so far as  he works with his eye fixed upon an eternal  pattern he is like the  human

artificer in the Republic.  Here the theory of  Platonic ideas  intrudes upon us.  God, like man, is supposed to

have an  ideal of  which Plato is unable to tell us the origin.  He may be said, in  the  language of modern

philosophy, to resolve the divine mind into subject  and object. 

The first work of creation is perfected, the second begins under  the  direction of inferior ministers.  The

supreme God is withdrawn  from the  world and returns to his own accustomed nature (Tim.).  As in  the

Statesman, he retires to his place of view.  So early did the  Epicurean  doctrine take possession of the Greek

mind, and so natural  is it to the  heart of man, when he has once passed out of the stage of  mythology into  that

of rational religion.  For he sees the marks of  design in the world;  but he no longer sees or fancies that he sees

God  walking in the garden or  haunting stream or mountain.  He feels also  that he must put God as far as

possible out of the way of evil, and  therefore he banishes him from an evil  world.  Plato is sensible of  the

difficulty; and he often shows that he is  desirous of justifying  the ways of God to man.  Yet on the other hand,

in  the Tenth Book of  the Laws he passes a censure on those who say that the  Gods have no  care of human

things. 

The creation of the world is the impression of order on a  previously  existing chaos.  The formula of

Anaxagoras'all things  were in chaos or  confusion, and then mind came and disposed them'is  a summary

of the first  part of the Timaeus.  It is true that of a  chaos without differences no  idea could be formed.  All was

not mixed  but one; and therefore it was not  difficult for the later Platonists  to draw inferences by which they

were  enabled to reconcile the  narrative of the Timaeus with the Mosaic account  of the creation.  Neither when

we speak of mind or intelligence, do we seem  to get much  further in our conception than circular motion,

which was  deemed to be  the most perfect.  Plato, like Anaxagoras, while commencing  his theory  of the

universe with ideas of mind and of the best, is compelled  in  the execution of his design to condescend to the

crudest physics. 

(c) The morality of the Timaeus is singular, and it is difficult to  adjust  the balance between the two elements

of it.  The difficulty  which Plato  feels, is that which all of us feel, and which is  increased in our own day  by

the progress of physical science, how the  responsibility of man is to be  reconciled with his dependence on

natural causes.  And sometimes, like  other men, he is more impressed  by one aspect of human life, sometimes


Timaeus

Timaeus 43



Top




Page No 46


by  the other.  In the Republic  he represents man as freely choosing his own  lot in a state prior to  birtha

conception which, if taken literally,  would still leave him  subject to the dominion of necessity in his after  life;

in the  Statesman he supposes the human race to be preserved in the  world only  by a divine interposition;

while in the Timaeus the supreme God  commissions the inferior deities to avert from him all but

selfinflicted  evilswords which imply that all the evils of men are  really self  inflicted.  And here, like

Plato (the insertion of a note  in the text of an  ancient writer is a literary curiosity worthy of  remark), we may

take  occasion to correct an error.  For we too hastily  said that Plato in the  Timaeus regarded all 'vices and

crimes as  involuntary.'  But the fact is  that he is inconsistent with himself;  in one and the same passage vice is

attributed to the relaxation of  the bodily frame, and yet we are exhorted  to avoid it and pursue  virtue.  It is also

admitted that good and evil  conduct are to be  attributed respectively to good and evil laws and  institutions.

These  cannot be given by individuals to themselves; and  therefore human  actions, in so far as they are

dependent upon them, are  regarded by  Plato as involuntary rather than voluntary.  Like other writers  on  this

subject, he is unable to escape from some degree of self  contradiction.  He had learned from Socrates that

vice is ignorance,  and  suddenly the doctrine seems to him to be confirmed by observing  how much of  the

good and bad in human character depends on the bodily  constitution.  So  in modern times the speculative

doctrine of  necessity has often been  supported by physical facts. 

The Timaeus also contains an anticipation of the stoical life  according to  nature.  Man contemplating the

heavens is to regulate his  erring life  according to them.  He is to partake of the repose of  nature and of the

order of nature, to bring the variable principle in  himself into harmony  with the principle of the same.  The

ethics of  the Timaeus may be summed up  in the single idea of 'law.'  To feel  habitually that he is part of the

order of the universe, is one of the  highest ethical motives of which man  is capable.  Something like this  is

what Plato means when he speaks of the  soul 'moving about the same  in unchanging thought of the same.'  He

does  not explain how man is  acted upon by the lesser influences of custom or of  opinion; or how  the

commands of the soul watching in the citadel are  conveyed to the  bodily organs.  But this perhaps, to use once

more  expressions of his  own, 'is part of another subject' or 'may be more  suitably discussed  on some other

occasion.' 

There is no difficulty, by the help of Aristotle and later writers,  in  criticizing the Timaeus of Plato, in pointing

out the  inconsistencies of  the work, in dwelling on the ignorance of anatomy  displayed by the author,  in

showing the fancifulness or unmeaningness  of some of his reasons.  But  the Timaeus still remains the greatest

effort of the human mind to conceive  the world as a whole which the  genius of antiquity has bequeathed to

us. 

... 

One more aspect of the Timaeus remains to be consideredthe  mythological  or geographical.  Is it not a

wonderful thing that a few  pages of one of  Plato's dialogues have grown into a great legend, not  confined to

Greece  only, but spreading far and wide over the nations  of Europe and reaching  even to Egypt and Asia?

Like the tale of Troy,  or the legend of the Ten  Tribes (Ewald, Hist. of Isr.), which perhaps  originated in a few

verses of  II Esdras, it has become famous, because  it has coincided with a great  historical fact.  Like the

romance of  King Arthur, which has had so great a  charm, it has found a way over  the seas from one country

and language to  another.  It inspired the  navigators of the fifteenth and sixteenth  centuries; it foreshadowed

the discovery of America.  It realized the  fiction so natural to the  human mind, because it answered the

enquiry about  the origin of the  arts, that there had somewhere existed an ancient  primitive  civilization.  It

might find a place wherever men chose to look  for  it; in North, South, East, or West; in the Islands of the

Blest; before  the entrance of the Straits of Gibraltar, in Sweden or in Palestine.  It  mattered little whether the

description in Plato agreed with the  locality  assigned to it or not.  It was a legend so adapted to the  human

mind that  it made a habitation for itself in any country.  It  was an island in the  clouds, which might be seen

anywhere by the eye  of faith.  It was a subject  especially congenial to the ponderous  industry of certain French

and  Swedish writers, who delighted in  heaping up learning of all sorts but were  incapable of using it. 


Timaeus

Timaeus 44



Top




Page No 47


M. Martin has written a valuable dissertation on the opinions  entertained  respecting the Island of Atlantis in

ancient and modern  times.  It is a  curious chapter in the history of the human mind.  The  tale of Atlantis is  the

fabric of a vision, but it has never ceased to  interest mankind.  It  was variously regarded by the ancients

themselves.  The stronger heads  among them, like Strabo and Longinus,  were as little disposed to believe in

the truth of it as the modern  reader in Gulliver or Robinson Crusoe.  On  the other hand there is no  kind or

degree of absurdity or fancy in which  the more foolish  writers, both of antiquity and of modern times, have

not  indulged  respecting it.  The NeoPlatonists, loyal to their master, like  some  commentators on the

Christian Scriptures, sought to give an  allegorical meaning to what they also believed to be an historical  fact.

It was as if some one in our own day were to convert the poems  of Homer  into an allegory of the Christian

religion, at the same time  maintaining  them to be an exact and veritable history.  In the Middle  Ages the

legend  seems to have been halfforgotten until revived by the  discovery of  America.  It helped to form the

Utopia of Sir Thomas More  and the New  Atlantis of Bacon, although probably neither of those  great men

were at all  imposed upon by the fiction.  It was most  prolific in the seventeenth or in  the early part of the

eighteenth  century, when the human mind, seeking for  Utopias or inventing them,  was glad to escape out of

the dulness of the  present into the romance  of the past or some ideal of the future.  The  later forms of such

narratives contained features taken from the Edda, as  well as from the  Old and New Testament; also from the

tales of missionaries  and the  experiences of travellers and of colonists. 

The various opinions respecting the Island of Atlantis have no  interest for  us except in so far as they illustrate

the extravagances  of which men are  capable.  But this is a real interest and a serious  lesson, if we remember

that now as formerly the human mind is liable  to be imposed upon by the  illusions of the past, which are ever

assuming some new form. 

When we have shaken off the rubbish of ages, there remain one or  two  questions of which the investigation

has a permanent value: 

1.  Did Plato derive the legend of Atlantis from an Egyptian  source?  It  may be replied that there is no such

legend in any writer  previous to  Plato; neither in Homer, nor in Pindar, nor in Herodotus  is there any  mention

of an Island of Atlantis, nor any reference to it  in Aristotle, nor  any citation of an earlier writer by a later one

in  which it is to be  found.  Nor have any traces been discovered hitherto  in Egyptian monuments  of a

connexion between Greece and Egypt older  than the eighth or ninth  century B.C.  It is true that Proclus,

writing in the fifth century after  Christ, tells us of stones and  columns in Egypt on which the history of the

Island of Atlantis was  engraved.  The statement may be falsethere are  similar tales about  columns set up 'by

the Canaanites whom Joshua drove  out' (Procop.);  but even if true, it would only show that the legend, 800

years after  the time of Plato, had been transferred to Egypt, and  inscribed, not,  like other forgeries, in books,

but on stone.  Probably in  the  Alexandrian age, when Egypt had ceased to have a history and began to

appropriate the legends of other nations, many such monuments were to  be  found of events which had

become famous in that or other countries.  The  oldest witness to the story is said to be Crantor, a Stoic

philosopher who  lived a generation later than Plato, and therefore may  have borrowed it  from him.  The

statement is found in Proclus; but we  require better  assurance than Proclus can give us before we accept  this

or any other  statement which he makes. 

Secondly, passing from the external to the internal evidence, we  may remark  that the story is far more likely

to have been invented by  Plato than to  have been brought by Solon from Egypt.  That is another  part of his

legend  which Plato also seeks to impose upon us.  The  verisimilitude which he has  given to the tale is a

further reason for  suspecting it; for he could  easily 'invent Egyptian or any other  tales' (Phaedrus).  Are not the

words,  'The truth of the story is a  great advantage,' if we read between the  lines, an indication of the  fiction?

It is only a legend that Solon went  to Egypt, and if he did  he could not have conversed with Egyptian priests

or have read records  in their temples.  The truth is that the introduction  is a mosaic work  of small touches

which, partly by their minuteness, and  also by their  seeming probability, win the confidence of the reader.

Who  would  desire better evidence than that of Critias, who had heard the  narrative in youth when the


Timaeus

Timaeus 45



Top




Page No 48


memory is strongest at the age of ten from  his  grandfather Critias, an old man of ninety, who in turn had

heard  it from  Solon himself?  Is not the famous expression'You Hellenes  are ever  children and there is no

knowledge among you hoary with age,'  really a  compliment to the Athenians who are described in these

words  as 'ever  young'?  And is the thought expressed in them to be  attributed to the  learning of the Egyptian

priest, and not rather to  the genius of Plato?  Or  when the Egyptian says'Hereafter at our  leisure we will

take up the  written documents and examine in detail  the exact truth about these  things'what is this but a

literary trick  by which Plato sets off his  narrative?  Could any war between Athens  and the Island of Atlantis

have  really coincided with the struggle  between the Greeks and Persians, as is  sufficiently hinted though not

expressly stated in the narrative of Plato?  And whence came the  tradition to Egypt? or in what does the story

consist  except in the  war between the two rival powers and the submersion of both  of them?  And how was

the tale transferred to the poem of Solon?  'It is  not  improbable,' says Mr. Grote, 'that Solon did leave an

unfinished  Egyptian poem' (Plato).  But are probabilities for which there is not  a  tittle of evidence, and which

are without any parallel, to be deemed  worthy  of attention by the critic?  How came the poem of Solon to

disappear in  antiquity? or why did Plato, if the whole narrative was  known to him, break  off almost at the

beginning of it? 

While therefore admiring the diligence and erudition of M. Martin,  we  cannot for a moment suppose that the

tale was told to Solon by an  Egyptian  priest, nor can we believe that Solon wrote a poem upon the  theme

which was  thus suggested to hima poem which disappeared in  antiquity; or that the  Island of Atlantis or

the antediluvian Athens  ever had any existence except  in the imagination of Plato.  Martin is  of opinion that

Plato would have  been terrified if he could have  foreseen the endless fancies to which his  Island of Atlantis

has given  occasion.  Rather he would have been  infinitely amused if he could  have known that his gift of

invention would  have deceived M. Martin  himself into the belief that the tradition was  brought from Egypt by

Solon and made the subject of a poem by him.  M.  Martin may also be  gently censured for citing without

sufficient  discrimination ancient  authors having very different degrees of authority  and value. 

2.  It is an interesting and not unimportant question which is  touched upon  by Martin, whether the Atlantis of

Plato in any degree  held out a guiding  light to the early navigators.  He is inclined to  think that there is no  real

connexion between them.  But surely the  discovery of the New World was  preceded by a prophetic

anticipation of  it, which, like the hope of a  Messiah, was entering into the hearts of  men?  And this hope was

nursed by  ancient tradition, which had found  expression from time to time in the  celebrated lines of Seneca

and in  many other places.  This tradition was  sustained by the great  authority of Plato, and therefore the

legend of the  Island of  Atlantis, though not closely connected with the voyages of the  early  navigators, may

be truly said to have contributed indirectly to the  great discovery. 

The Timaeus of Plato, like the Protagoras and several portions of  the  Phaedrus and Republic, was translated

by Cicero into Latin.  About  a  fourth, comprehending with lacunae the first portion of the  dialogue, is

preserved in several MSS.  These generally agree, and  therefore may be  supposed to be derived from a single

original.  The  version is very  faithful, and is a remarkable monument of Cicero's  skill in managing the

difficult and intractable Greek.  In his  treatise De Natura Deorum, he also  refers to the Timaeus, which,

speaking in the person of Velleius the  Epicurean, he severely  criticises. 

The commentary of Proclus on the Timaeus is a wonderful monument of  the  silliness and prolixity of the

Alexandrian Age.  It extends to  about thirty  pages of the book, and is thirty times the length of the  original.  It

is  surprising that this voluminous work should have  found a translator (Thomas  Taylor, a kindred spirit, who

was himself a  NeoPlatonist, after the  fashion, not of the fifth or sixteenth, but  of the nineteenth century

A.D.).  The commentary is of little or no  value, either in a philosophical  or philological point of view.  The

writer is unable to explain particular  passages in any precise manner,  and he is equally incapable of grasping

the  whole.  He does not take  words in their simple meaning or sentences in  their natural connexion.  He is

thinking, not of the context in Plato, but  of the contemporary  Pythagorean philosophers and their wordy

strife.  He  finds nothing in  the text which he does not bring to it.  He is full of  Porphyry,  Iamblichus and


Timaeus

Timaeus 46



Top




Page No 49


Plotinus, of misapplied logic, of misunderstood  grammar, and of the Orphic theology. 

Although such a work can contribute little or nothing to the  understanding  of Plato, it throws an interesting

light on the  Alexandrian times; it  realizes how a philosophy made up of words only  may create a deep and

widespread enthusiasm, how the forms of logic  and rhetoric may usurp the  place of reason and truth, how all

philosophies grow faded and discoloured,  and are patched and made up  again like wornout garments, and

retain only a  secondhand existence.  He who would study this degeneracy of philosophy  and of the Greek

mind in the original cannot do better than devote a few of  his days  and nights to the commentary of Proclus

on the Timaeus. 

A very different account must be given of the short work entitled  'Timaeus  Locrus,' which is a brief but clear

analysis of the Timaeus  of Plato,  omitting the introduction or dialogue and making a few small  additions.  It

does not allude to the original from which it is taken;  it is quite free  from mysticism and NeoPlatonism.  In

length it does  not exceed a fifth  part of the Timaeus.  It is written in the Doric  dialect, and contains  several

words which do not occur in classical  Greek.  No other indication  of its date, except this uncertain one of

language, appears in it.  In  several places the writer has simplified  the language of Plato, in a few  others he

has embellished and  exaggerated it.  He generally preserves the  thought of the original,  but does not copy the

words.  On the whole this  little tract  faithfully reflects the meaning and spirit of the Timaeus. 

From the garden of the Timaeus, as from the other dialogues of  Plato, we  may still gather a few flowers and

present them at parting  to the reader.  There is nothing in Plato grander and simpler than the  conversation

between  Solon and the Egyptian priest, in which the  youthfulness of Hellas is  contrasted with the antiquity of

Egypt.  Here are to be found the famous  words, 'O Solon, Solon, you Hellenes  are ever young, and there is not

an  old man among you'which may be  compared to the lively saying of Hegel,  that 'Greek history began

with  the youth Achilles and left off with the  youth Alexander.'  The  numerous arts of verisimilitude by which

Plato  insinuates into the  mind of the reader the truth of his narrative have been  already  referred to.  Here occur

a sentence or two not wanting in Platonic  irony (Greeka word to the wise).  'To know or tell the origin of

the  other divinities is beyond us, and we must accept the traditions of  the men  of old time who affirm

themselves to be the offspring of the  Godsthat is  what they sayand they must surely have known their

own  ancestors.  How  can we doubt the word of the children of the Gods?  Although they give no  probable or

certain proofs, still, as they  declare that they are speaking  of what took place in their own family,  we must

conform to custom and  believe them.'  'Our creators well knew  that women and other animals would  some day

be framed out of men, and  they further knew that many animals  would require the use of nails for  many

purposes; wherefore they fashioned  in men at their first creation  the rudiments of nails.'  Or once more, let  us

reflect on two serious  passages in which the order of the world is  supposed to find a place  in the human soul

and to infuse harmony into it.  'The soul, when  touching anything that has essence, whether dispersed in  parts

or  undivided, is stirred through all her powers to declare the  sameness  or difference of that thing and some

other; and to what  individuals  are related, and by what affected, and in what way and how and  when,  both in

the world of generation and in the world of immutable being.  And when reason, which works with equal

truth, whether she be in the  circle  of the diverse or of the same,in voiceless silence holding  her onward

course in the sphere of the selfmoved,when reason, I  say, is hovering  around the sensible world, and

when the circle of the  diverse also moving  truly imparts the intimations of sense to the  whole soul, then arise

opinions and beliefs sure and certain.  But  when reason is concerned with  the rational, and the circle of the

same  moving smoothly declares it, then  intelligence and knowledge are  necessarily perfected;' where,

proceeding in  a similar path of  contemplation, he supposes the inward and the outer world  mutually to  imply

each other.  'God invented and gave us sight to the end  that we  might behold the courses of intelligence in the

heaven, and apply  them  to the courses of our own intelligence which are akin to them, the  unperturbed to the

perturbed; and that we, learning them and partaking  of  the natural truth of reason, might imitate the

absolutely unerring  courses  of God and regulate our own vagaries.'  Or let us weigh  carefully some  other

profound thoughts, such as the following.  'He  who neglects education  walks lame to the end of his life, and

returns  imperfect and good for  nothing to the world below.'  'The father and  maker of all this universe is  past


Timaeus

Timaeus 47



Top




Page No 50


finding out; and even if we found  him, to tell of him to all men would  be impossible.'  'Let me tell you  then

why the Creator made this world of  generation.  He was good, and  the good can never have jealousy of

anything.  And being free from  jealousy, he desired that all things should be as like  himself as they  could be.

This is in the truest sense the origin of  creation and of  the world, as we shall do well in believing on the

testimony of wise  men:  God desired that all things should be good and  nothing bad, so  far as this was

attainable.'  This is the leading thought  in the  Timaeus, just as the IDEA of Good is the leading thought of the

Republic, the one expression describing the personal, the other the  impersonal Good or God, differing in form

rather than in substance,  and  both equally implying to the mind of Plato a divine reality.  The  slight  touch,

perhaps ironical, contained in the words, 'as we shall  do well in  believing on the testimony of wise men,' is

very  characteristic of Plato. 

TIMAEUS.

PERSONS OF THE DIALOGUE:  Socrates, Critias, Timaeus, Hermocrates.

SOCRATES: One, two, three; but where, my dear Timaeus, is  the fourth of  those who were yesterday my

guests and are to be my  entertainers today? 

TIMAEUS: He has been taken ill, Socrates; for he would not  willingly have  been absent from this gathering. 

SOCRATES: Then, if he is not coming, you and the two others  must supply  his place. 

TIMAEUS: Certainly, and we will do all that we can; having  been handsomely  entertained by you yesterday,

those of us who remain  should be only too  glad to return your hospitality. 

SOCRATES: Do you remember what were the points of which I  required you to  speak? 

TIMAEUS: We remember some of them, and you will be here to  remind us of  anything which we have

forgotten:  or rather, if we are  not troubling you,  will you briefly recapitulate the whole, and then  the

particulars will be  more firmly fixed in our memories? 

SOCRATES: To be sure I will:  the chief theme of my  yesterday's discourse  was the Statehow constituted

and of what  citizens composed it would seem  likely to be most perfect. 

TIMAEUS: Yes, Socrates; and what you said of it was very  much to our mind. 

SOCRATES: Did we not begin by separating the husbandmen and  the artisans  from the class of defenders of

the State? 

TIMAEUS: Yes. 

SOCRATES: And when we had given to each one that single  employment and  particular art which was

suited to his nature, we spoke  of those who were  intended to be our warriors, and said that they were  to be

guardians of the  city against attacks from within as well as  from without, and to have no  other employment;

they were to be  merciful in judging their subjects, of  whom they were by nature  friends, but fierce to their

enemies, when they  came across them in  battle. 

TIMAEUS: Exactly. 

SOCRATES: We said, if I am not mistaken, that the guardians  should be  gifted with a temperament in a

high degree both passionate  and  philosophical; and that then they would be as they ought to be,  gentle to  their


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 48



Top




Page No 51


friends and fierce with their enemies. 

TIMAEUS: Certainly. 

SOCRATES: And what did we say of their education?  Were they  not to be  trained in gymnastic, and music,

and all other sorts of  knowledge which  were proper for them? 

TIMAEUS: Very true. 

SOCRATES: And being thus trained they were not to consider  gold or silver  or anything else to be their own

private property; they  were to be like  hired troops, receiving pay for keeping guard from  those who were

protected  by themthe pay was to be no more than would  suffice for men of simple  life; and they were to

spend in common, and  to live together in the  continual practice of virtue, which was to be  their sole pursuit. 

TIMAEUS: That was also said. 

SOCRATES: Neither did we forget the women; of whom we  declared, that their  natures should be

assimilated and brought into  harmony with those of the  men, and that common pursuits should be  assigned to

them both in time of  war and in their ordinary life. 

TIMAEUS: That, again, was as you say. 

SOCRATES: And what about the procreation of children?  Or  rather was not  the proposal too singular to be

forgotten? for all  wives and children were  to be in common, to the intent that no one  should ever know his

own child,  but they were to imagine that they  were all one family; those who were  within a suitable limit of

age  were to be brothers and sisters, those who  were of an elder generation  parents and grandparents, and

those of a  younger, children and  grandchildren. 

TIMAEUS: Yes, and the proposal is easy to remember, as you  say. 

SOCRATES: And do you also remember how, with a view of  securing as far as  we could the best breed, we

said that the chief  magistrates, male and  female, should contrive secretly, by the use of  certain lots, so to

arrange  the nuptial meeting, that the bad of  either sex and the good of either sex  might pair with their like;

and  there was to be no quarrelling on this  account, for they would imagine  that the union was a mere

accident, and was  to be attributed to the  lot? 

TIMAEUS: I remember. 

SOCRATES: And you remember how we said that the children of  the good  parents were to be educated, and

the children of the bad  secretly dispersed  among the inferior citizens; and while they were  all growing up the

rulers  were to be on the lookout, and to bring up  from below in their turn those  who were worthy, and those

among  themselves who were unworthy were to take  the places of those who came  up? 

TIMAEUS: True. 

SOCRATES: Then have I now given you all the heads of our  yesterday's  discussion?  Or is there anything

more, my dear Timaeus,  which has been  omitted? 

TIMAEUS: Nothing, Socrates; it was just as you have said. 


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 49



Top




Page No 52


SOCRATES: I should like, before proceeding further, to tell  you how I feel  about the State which we have

described.  I might  compare myself to a  person who, on beholding beautiful animals either  created by the

painter's  art, or, better still, alive but at rest, is  seized with a desire of seeing  them in motion or engaged in

some  struggle or conflict to which their forms  appear suited; this is my  feeling about the State which we have

been  describing.  There are  conflicts which all cities undergo, and I should  like to hear some one  tell of our

own city carrying on a struggle against  her neighbours,  and how she went out to war in a becoming manner,

and when  at war  showed by the greatness of her actions and the magnanimity of her  words in dealing with

other cities a result worthy of her training and  education.  Now I, Critias and Hermocrates, am conscious that I

myself  should never be able to celebrate the city and her citizens in a  befitting  manner, and I am not surprised

at my own incapacity; to me  the wonder is  rather that the poets present as well as past are no  betternot that

I  mean to depreciate them; but every one can see that  they are a tribe of  imitators, and will imitate best and

most easily  the life in which they  have been brought up; while that which is  beyond the range of a man's

education he finds hard to carry out in  action, and still harder adequately  to represent in language.  I am  aware

that the Sophists have plenty of  brave words and fair conceits,  but I am afraid that being only wanderers  from

one city to another,  and having never had habitations of their own,  they may fail in their  conception of

philosophers and statesmen, and may  not know what they  do and say in time of war, when they are fighting

or  holding parley  with their enemies.  And thus people of your class are the  only ones  remaining who are

fitted by nature and education to take part at  once  both in politics and philosophy.  Here is Timaeus, of Locris

in Italy,  a city which has admirable laws, and who is himself in wealth and rank  the  equal of any of his

fellowcitizens; he has held the most  important and  honourable offices in his own state, and, as I believe,  has

scaled the  heights of all philosophy; and here is Critias, whom  every Athenian knows  to be no novice in the

matters of which we are  speaking; and as to  Hermocrates, I am assured by many witnesses that  his genius and

education  qualify him to take part in any speculation  of the kind.  And therefore  yesterday when I saw that

you wanted me to  describe the formation of the  State, I readily assented, being very  well aware, that, if you

only would,  none were better qualified to  carry the discussion further, and that when  you had engaged our

city  in a suitable war, you of all men living could  best exhibit her  playing a fitting part.  When I had

completed my task, I  in return  imposed this other task upon you.  You conferred together and  agreed  to

entertain me today, as I had entertained you, with a feast of  discourse.  Here am I in festive array, and no

man can be more ready  for  the promised banquet. 

HERMOCRATES: And we too, Socrates, as Timaeus says, will not  be wanting in  enthusiasm; and there is

no excuse for not complying  with your request.  As  soon as we arrived yesterday at the  guestchamber of

Critias, with whom we  are staying, or rather on our  way thither, we talked the matter over, and  he told us an

ancient  tradition, which I wish, Critias, that you would  repeat to Socrates,  so that he may help us to judge

whether it will satisfy  his  requirements or not. 

CRITIAS: I will, if Timaeus, who is our other partner,  approves. 

TIMAEUS: I quite approve. 

CRITIAS: Then listen, Socrates, to a tale which, though  strange, is  certainly true, having been attested by

Solon, who was the  wisest of the  seven sages.  He was a relative and a dear friend of my  greatgrandfather,

Dropides, as he himself says in many passages of  his poems; and he told the  story to Critias, my grandfather,

who  remembered and repeated it to us.  There were of old, he said, great  and marvellous actions of the

Athenian  city, which have passed into  oblivion through lapse of time and the  destruction of mankind, and one

in particular, greater than all the rest.  This we will now rehearse.  It will be a fitting monument of our

gratitude  to you, and a hymn of  praise true and worthy of the goddess, on this her  day of festival. 

SOCRATES: Very good.  And what is this ancient famous action  of the  Athenians, which Critias declared,

on the authority of Solon,  to be not a  mere legend, but an actual fact? 


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 50



Top




Page No 53


CRITIAS: I will tell an oldworld story which I heard from  an aged man;  for Critias, at the time of telling it,

was, as he said,  nearly ninety  years of age, and I was about ten.  Now the day was that  day of the  Apaturia

which is called the Registration of Youth, at  which, according to  custom, our parents gave prizes for

recitations,  and the poems of several  poets were recited by us boys, and many of us  sang the poems of Solon,

which at that time had not gone out of  fashion.  One of our tribe, either  because he thought so or to please

Critias, said that in his judgment Solon  was not only the wisest of  men, but also the noblest of poets.  The old

man, as I very well  remember, brightened up at hearing this and said,  smiling:  Yes,  Amynander, if Solon had

only, like other poets, made poetry  the  business of his life, and had completed the tale which he brought with

him from Egypt, and had not been compelled, by reason of the factions  and  troubles which he found stirring

in his own country when he came  home, to  attend to other matters, in my opinion he would have been as

famous as  Homer or Hesiod, or any poet. 

And what was the tale about, Critias? said Amynander. 

About the greatest action which the Athenians ever did, and which  ought to  have been the most famous, but,

through the lapse of time and  the  destruction of the actors, it has not come down to us. 

Tell us, said the other, the whole story, and how and from whom  Solon heard  this veritable tradition. 

He replied:In the Egyptian Delta, at the head of which the river  Nile  divides, there is a certain district

which is called the district  of Sais,  and the great city of the district is also called Sais, and  is the city  from

which King Amasis came.  The citizens have a deity  for their  foundress; she is called in the Egyptian tongue

Neith, and  is asserted by  them to be the same whom the Hellenes call Athene; they  are great lovers of  the

Athenians, and say that they are in some way  related to them.  To this  city came Solon, and was received there

with  great honour; he asked the  priests who were most skilful in such  matters, about antiquity, and made  the

discovery that neither he nor  any other Hellene knew anything worth  mentioning about the times of  old.  On

one occasion, wishing to draw them  on to speak of antiquity,  he began to tell about the most ancient things in

our part of the  worldabout Phoroneus, who is called 'the first man,' and  about  Niobe; and after the Deluge,

of the survival of Deucalion and Pyrrha;  and he traced the genealogy of their descendants, and reckoning up

the  dates, tried to compute how many years ago the events of which he was  speaking happened.  Thereupon

one of the priests, who was of a very  great  age, said:  O Solon, Solon, you Hellenes are never anything but

children,  and there is not an old man among you.  Solon in return  asked him what he  meant.  I mean to say, he

replied, that in mind you  are all young; there is  no old opinion handed down among you by  ancient tradition,

nor any science  which is hoary with age.  And I  will tell you why.  There have been, and  will be again, many

destructions of mankind arising out of many causes; the  greatest have  been brought about by the agencies of

fire and water, and  other lesser  ones by innumerable other causes.  There is a story, which  even you  have

preserved, that once upon a time Paethon, the son of Helios,  having yoked the steeds in his father's chariot,

because he was not  able to  drive them in the path of his father, burnt up all that was  upon the earth,  and was

himself destroyed by a thunderbolt.  Now this  has the form of a  myth, but really signifies a declination of the

bodies moving in the  heavens around the earth, and a great  conflagration of things upon the  earth, which

recurs after long  intervals; at such times those who live upon  the mountains and in dry  and lofty places are

more liable to destruction  than those who dwell  by rivers or on the seashore.  And from this calamity  the Nile,

who is  our neverfailing saviour, delivers and preserves us.  When, on the  other hand, the gods purge the

earth with a deluge of water,  the  survivors in your country are herdsmen and shepherds who dwell on the

mountains, but those who, like you, live in cities are carried by the  rivers into the sea.  Whereas in this land,

neither then nor at any  other  time, does the water come down from above on the fields, having  always a

tendency to come up from below; for which reason the  traditions preserved  here are the most ancient.  The

fact is, that  wherever the extremity of  winter frost or of summer sun does not  prevent, mankind exist,

sometimes in  greater, sometimes in lesser  numbers.  And whatever happened either in your  country or in ours,

or  in any other region of which we are informedif  there were any  actions noble or great or in any other

way remarkable, they  have all  been written down by us of old, and are preserved in our temples.  Whereas just


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 51



Top




Page No 54


when you and other nations are beginning to be provided  with  letters and the other requisites of civilized life,

after the  usual  interval, the stream from heaven, like a pestilence, comes  pouring down,  and leaves only those

of you who are destitute of  letters and education;  and so you have to begin all over again like  children, and

know nothing of  what happened in ancient times, either  among us or among yourselves.  As  for those

genealogies of yours which  you just now recounted to us, Solon,  they are no better than the tales  of children.

In the first place you  remember a single deluge only,  but there were many previous ones; in the  next place,

you do not know  that there formerly dwelt in your land the  fairest and noblest race of  men which ever lived,

and that you and your  whole city are descended  from a small seed or remnant of them which  survived.  And

this was  unknown to you, because, for many generations, the  survivors of that  destruction died, leaving no

written word.  For there was  a time,  Solon, before the great deluge of all, when the city which now is  Athens

was first in war and in every way the best governed of all  cities,  is said to have performed the noblest deeds

and to have had  the fairest  constitution of any of which tradition tells, under the  face of heaven.  Solon

marvelled at his words, and earnestly requested  the priests to inform  him exactly and in order about these

former  citizens.  You are welcome to  hear about them, Solon, said the priest,  both for your own sake and for

that of your city, and above all, for  the sake of the goddess who is the  common patron and parent and

educator of both our cities.  She founded your  city a thousand years  before ours (Observe that Plato gives the

same date  (9000 years ago)  for the foundation of Athens and for the repulse of the  invasion from  Atlantis

(Crit.).), receiving from the Earth and Hephaestus  the seed  of your race, and afterwards she founded ours, of

which the  constitution is recorded in our sacred registers to be 8000 years old.  As  touching your citizens of

9000 years ago, I will briefly inform  you of  their laws and of their most famous action; the exact  particulars

of the  whole we will hereafter go through at our leisure  in the sacred registers  themselves.  If you compare

these very laws  with ours you will find that  many of ours are the counterpart of yours  as they were in the

olden time.  In the first place, there is the caste  of priests, which is separated from  all the others; next, there

are  the artificers, who ply their several  crafts by themselves and do not  intermix; and also there is the class of

shepherds and of hunters, as  well as that of husbandmen; and you will  observe, too, that the  warriors in Egypt

are distinct from all the other  classes, and are  commanded by the law to devote themselves solely to  military

pursuits;  moreover, the weapons which they carry are shields and  spears, a style  of equipment which the

goddess taught of Asiatics first to  us, as in  your part of the world first to you.  Then as to wisdom, do you

observe how our law from the very first made a study of the whole  order of  things, extending even to

prophecy and medicine which gives  health, out of  these divine elements deriving what was needful for  human

life, and adding  every sort of knowledge which was akin to them.  All this order and  arrangement the goddess

first imparted to you when  establishing your city;  and she chose the spot of earth in which you  were born,

because she saw  that the happy temperament of the seasons  in that land would produce the  wisest of men.

Wherefore the goddess,  who was a lover both of war and of  wisdom, selected and first of all  settled that spot

which was the most  likely to produce men likest  herself.  And there you dwelt, having such  laws as these and

still  better ones, and excelled all mankind in all  virtue, as became the  children and disciples of the gods. 

Many great and wonderful deeds are recorded of your state in our  histories.  But one of them exceeds all the

rest in greatness and  valour.  For these  histories tell of a mighty power which unprovoked  made an expedition

against the whole of Europe and Asia, and to which  your city put an end.  This power came forth out of the

Atlantic Ocean,  for in those days the  Atlantic was navigable; and there was an island  situated in front of the

straits which are by you called the Pillars  of Heracles; the island was  larger than Libya and Asia put together,

and was the way to other islands,  and from these you might pass to the  whole of the opposite continent which

surrounded the true ocean; for  this sea which is within the Straits of  Heracles is only a harbour,  having a

narrow entrance, but that other is a  real sea, and the  surrounding land may be most truly called a boundless

continent.  Now  in this island of Atlantis there was a great and wonderful  empire  which had rule over the

whole island and several others, and over  parts of the continent, and, furthermore, the men of Atlantis had

subjected  the parts of Libya within the columns of Heracles as far as  Egypt, and of  Europe as far as

Tyrrhenia.  This vast power, gathered  into one,  endeavoured to subdue at a blow our country and yours and

the whole of the  region within the straits; and then, Solon, your  country shone forth, in  the excellence of her

virtue and strength,  among all mankind.  She was  preeminent in courage and military skill,  and was the


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 52



Top




Page No 55


leader of the  Hellenes.  And when the rest fell off from  her, being compelled to stand  alone, after having

undergone the very  extremity of danger, she defeated  and triumphed over the invaders, and  preserved from

slavery those who were  not yet subjugated, and  generously liberated all the rest of us who dwell  within the

pillars.  But afterwards there occurred violent earthquakes and  floods; and in  a single day and night of

misfortune all your warlike men in  a body  sank into the earth, and the island of Atlantis in like manner

disappeared in the depths of the sea.  For which reason the sea in  those  parts is impassable and impenetrable,

because there is a shoal  of mud in  the way; and this was caused by the subsidence of the  island. 

I have told you briefly, Socrates, what the aged Critias heard from  Solon  and related to us.  And when you

were speaking yesterday about  your city  and citizens, the tale which I have just been repeating to  you came

into my  mind, and I remarked with astonishment how, by some  mysterious coincidence,  you agreed in almost

every particular with the  narrative of Solon; but I  did not like to speak at the moment.  For a  long time had

elapsed, and I  had forgotten too much; I thought that I  must first of all run over the  narrative in my own mind,

and then I  would speak.  And so I readily  assented to your request yesterday,  considering that in all such cases

the  chief difficulty is to find a  tale suitable to our purpose, and that with  such a tale we should be  fairly well

provided. 

And therefore, as Hermocrates has told you, on my way home  yesterday I at  once communicated the tale to

my companions as I  remembered it; and after I  left them, during the night by thinking I  recovered nearly the

whole of it.  Truly, as is often said, the lessons  of our childhood make a wonderful  impression on our

memories; for I am  not sure that I could remember all the  discourse of yesterday, but I  should be much

surprised if I forgot any of  these things which I have  heard very long ago.  I listened at the time with  childlike

interest  to the old man's narrative; he was very ready to teach  me, and I asked  him again and again to repeat

his words, so that like an  indelible  picture they were branded into my mind.  As soon as the day  broke, I

rehearsed them as he spoke them to my companions, that they, as  well  as myself, might have something to

say.  And now, Socrates, to make an  end of my preface, I am ready to tell you the whole tale.  I will give  you

not only the general heads, but the particulars, as they were told  to me.  The city and citizens, which you

yesterday described to us in  fiction, we  will now transfer to the world of reality.  It shall be  the ancient city of

Athens, and we will suppose that the citizens whom  you imagined, were our  veritable ancestors, of whom the

priest spoke;  they will perfectly  harmonize, and there will be no inconsistency in  saying that the citizens  of

your republic are these ancient Athenians.  Let us divide the subject  among us, and all endeavour according to

our ability gracefully to execute  the task which you have imposed upon  us.  Consider then, Socrates, if this

narrative is suited to the  purpose, or whether we should seek for some  other instead. 

SOCRATES: And what other, Critias, can we find that will be  better than  this, which is natural and suitable

to the festival of the  goddess, and has  the very great advantage of being a fact and not a  fiction?  How or

where  shall we find another if we abandon this?  We  cannot, and therefore you  must tell the tale, and good

luck to you;  and I in return for my  yesterday's discourse will now rest and be a  listener. 

CRITIAS: Let me proceed to explain to you, Socrates, the  order in which we  have arranged our

entertainment.  Our intention is,  that Timaeus, who is  the most of an astronomer amongst us, and has  made the

nature of the  universe his special study, should speak first,  beginning with the  generation of the world and

going down to the  creation of man; next, I am  to receive the men whom he has created,  and of whom some

will have profited  by the excellent education which  you have given them; and then, in  accordance with the

tale of Solon,  and equally with his law, we will bring  them into court and make them  citizens, as if they were

those very  Athenians whom the sacred  Egyptian record has recovered from oblivion, and  thenceforward we

will  speak of them as Athenians and fellowcitizens. 

SOCRATES: I see that I shall receive in my turn a perfect  and splendid  feast of reason.  And now, Timaeus,

you, I suppose,  should speak next,  after duly calling upon the Gods. 


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 53



Top




Page No 56


TIMAEUS: All men, Socrates, who have any degree of right  feeling, at the  beginning of every enterprise,

whether small or great,  always call upon  God.  And we, too, who are going to discourse of the  nature of the

universe, how created or how existing without creation,  if we be not  altogether out of our wits, must invoke

the aid of Gods  and Goddesses and  pray that our words may be acceptable to them and  consistent with

themselves.  Let this, then, be our invocation of the  Gods, to which I add  an exhortation of myself to speak in

such manner  as will be most  intelligible to you, and will most accord with my own  intent. 

First then, in my judgment, we must make a distinction and ask,  What is  that which always is and has no

becoming; and what is that  which is always  becoming and never is?  That which is apprehended by

intelligence and  reason is always in the same state; but that which is  conceived by opinion  with the help of

sensation and without reason, is  always in a process of  becoming and perishing and never really is.  Now

everything that becomes or  is created must of necessity be  created by some cause, for without a cause  nothing

can be created.  The work of the creator, whenever he looks to the  unchangeable and  fashions the form and

nature of his work after an  unchangeable  pattern, must necessarily be made fair and perfect; but when  he

looks  to the created only, and uses a created pattern, it is not fair or  perfect.  Was the heaven then or the

world, whether called by this or  by  any other more appropriate nameassuming the name, I am asking a

question  which has to be asked at the beginning of an enquiry about  anythingwas  the world, I say, always

in existence and without  beginning? or created,  and had it a beginning?  Created, I reply,  being visible and

tangible and  having a body, and therefore sensible;  and all sensible things are  apprehended by opinion and

sense and are  in a process of creation and  created.  Now that which is created must,  as we affirm, of necessity

be  created by a cause.  But the father and  maker of all this universe is past  finding out; and even if we found

him, to tell of him to all men would be  impossible.  And there is  still a question to be asked about him:  Which

of  the patterns had the  artificer in view when he made the worldthe pattern  of the  unchangeable, or of that

which is created?  If the world be indeed  fair and the artificer good, it is manifest that he must have looked  to

that which is eternal; but if what cannot be said without blasphemy  is  true, then to the created pattern.  Every

one will see that he must  have  looked to the eternal; for the world is the fairest of creations  and he is  the best

of causes.  And having been created in this way,  the world has  been framed in the likeness of that which is

apprehended  by reason and mind  and is unchangeable, and must therefore of  necessity, if this is admitted,  be

a copy of something.  Now it is  allimportant that the beginning of  everything should be according to  nature.

And in speaking of the copy and  the original we may assume  that words are akin to the matter which they

describe; when they  relate to the lasting and permanent and intelligible,  they ought to be  lasting and

unalterable, and, as far as their nature  allows,  irrefutable and immovablenothing less.  But when they

express  only  the copy or likeness and not the eternal things themselves, they need  only be likely and

analogous to the real words.  As being is to  becoming,  so is truth to belief.  If then, Socrates, amid the many

opinions about the  gods and the generation of the universe, we are not  able to give notions  which are

altogether and in every respect exact  and consistent with one  another, do not be surprised.  Enough, if we

adduce probabilities as likely  as any others; for we must remember  that I who am the speaker, and you who

are the judges, are only mortal  men, and we ought to accept the tale which  is probable and enquire no  further. 

SOCRATES: Excellent, Timaeus; and we will do precisely as  you bid us.  The  prelude is charming, and is

already accepted by  usmay we beg of you to  proceed to the strain? 

TIMAEUS: Let me tell you then why the creator made this  world of  generation.  He was good, and the good

can never have any  jealousy of  anything.  And being free from jealousy, he desired that  all things should  be as

like himself as they could be.  This is in the  truest sense the  origin of creation and of the world, as we shall do

well in believing on  the testimony of wise men:  God desired that all  things should be good and  nothing bad,

so far as this was attainable.  Wherefore also finding the  whole visible sphere not at rest, but  moving in an

irregular and disorderly  fashion, out of disorder he  brought order, considering that this was in  every way

better than the  other.  Now the deeds of the best could never be  or have been other  than the fairest; and the

creator, reflecting on the  things which are  by nature visible, found that no unintelligent creature  taken as a

whole was fairer than the intelligent taken as a whole; and that  intelligence could not be present in anything


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 54



Top




Page No 57


which was devoid of  soul.  For which reason, when he was framing the universe, he put  intelligence in  soul,

and soul in body, that he might be the creator  of a work which was by  nature fairest and best.  Wherefore,

using the  language of probability, we  may say that the world became a living  creature truly endowed with

soul and  intelligence by the providence of  God. 

This being supposed, let us proceed to the next stage:  In the  likeness of  what animal did the Creator make the

world?  It would be  an unworthy thing  to liken it to any nature which exists as a part  only; for nothing can be

beautiful which is like any imperfect thing;  but let us suppose the world  to be the very image of that whole of

which all other animals both  individually and in their tribes are  portions.  For the original of the  universe

contains in itself all  intelligible beings, just as this world  comprehends us and all other  visible creatures.  For

the Deity, intending  to make this world like  the fairest and most perfect of intelligible  beings, framed one

visible animal comprehending within itself all other  animals of a  kindred nature.  Are we right in saying that

there is one  world, or  that they are many and infinite?  There must be one only, if the  created copy is to accord

with the original.  For that which includes  all  other intelligible creatures cannot have a second or companion;

in  that  case there would be need of another living being which would  include both,  and of which they would

be parts, and the likeness would  be more truly said  to resemble not them, but that other which included  them.

In order then  that the world might be solitary, like the  perfect animal, the creator made  not two worlds or an

infinite number  of them; but there is and ever will be  one onlybegotten and created  heaven. 

Now that which is created is of necessity corporeal, and also  visible and  tangible.  And nothing is visible

where there is no fire,  or tangible which  has no solidity, and nothing is solid without earth.  Wherefore also

God in  the beginning of creation made the body of the  universe to consist of fire  and earth.  But two things

cannot be  rightly put together without a third;  there must be some bond of union  between them.  And the

fairest bond is  that which makes the most  complete fusion of itself and the things which it  combines; and

proportion is best adapted to effect such a union.  For  whenever in  any three numbers, whether cube or square,

there is a mean,  which is  to the last term what the first term is to it; and again, when the  mean is to the first

term as the last term is to the meanthen the  mean  becoming first and last, and the first and last both

becoming  means, they  will all of them of necessity come to be the same, and  having become the  same with

one another will be all one.  If the  universal frame had been  created a surface only and having no depth, a

single mean would have  sufficed to bind together itself and the other  terms; but now, as the world  must be

solid, and solid bodies are  always compacted not by one mean but by  two, God placed water and air  in the

mean between fire and earth, and made  them to have the same  proportion so far as was possible (as fire is to

air  so is air to  water, and as air is to water so is water to earth); and thus  he bound  and put together a visible

and tangible heaven.  And for these  reasons, and out of such elements which are in number four, the body  of

the  world was created, and it was harmonized by proportion, and  therefore has  the spirit of friendship; and

having been reconciled to  itself, it was  indissoluble by the hand of any other than the framer. 

Now the creation took up the whole of each of the four elements;  for the  Creator compounded the world out

of all the fire and all the  water and all  the air and all the earth, leaving no part of any of  them nor any power

of  them outside.  His intention was, in the first  place, that the animal  should be as far as possible a perfect

whole  and of perfect parts:  secondly, that it should be one, leaving no  remnants out of which another  such

world might be created:  and also  that it should be free from old age  and unaffected by disease.  Considering

that if heat and cold and other  powerful forces which  unite bodies surround and attack them from without

when they are  unprepared, they decompose them, and by bringing diseases and  old age  upon them, make

them waste awayfor this cause and on these  grounds  he made the world one whole, having every part

entire, and being  therefore perfect and not liable to old age and disease.  And he gave  to  the world the figure

which was suitable and also natural.  Now to  the  animal which was to comprehend all animals, that figure was

suitable which  comprehends within itself all other figures.  Wherefore  he made the world  in the form of a

globe, round as from a lathe,  having its extremes in every  direction equidistant from the centre,  the most

perfect and the most like  itself of all figures; for he  considered that the like is infinitely fairer  than the unlike.

This  he finished off, making the surface smooth all round  for many reasons;  in the first place, because the


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 55



Top




Page No 58


living being had no need  of eyes when  there was nothing remaining outside him to be seen; nor of  ears when

there was nothing to be heard; and there was no surrounding  atmosphere  to be breathed; nor would there have

been any use of organs by  the  help of which he might receive his food or get rid of what he had  already

digested, since there was nothing which went from him or came  into  him:  for there was nothing beside him.

Of design he was created  thus, his  own waste providing his own food, and all that he did or  suffered taking

place in and by himself.  For the Creator conceived  that a being which was  selfsufficient would be far more

excellent  than one which lacked anything;  and, as he had no need to take  anything or defend himself against

any one,  the Creator did not think  it necessary to bestow upon him hands:  nor had  he any need of feet,  nor of

the whole apparatus of walking; but the  movement suited to his  spherical form was assigned to him, being of

all the  seven that which  is most appropriate to mind and intelligence; and he was  made to move  in the same

manner and on the same spot, within his own limits  revolving in a circle.  All the other six motions were taken

away from  him,  and he was made not to partake of their deviations.  And as this  circular  movement required

no feet, the universe was created without  legs and  without feet. 

Such was the whole plan of the eternal God about the god that was  to be, to  whom for this reason he gave a

body, smooth and even, having  a surface in  every direction equidistant from the centre, a body  entire and

perfect, and  formed out of perfect bodies.  And in the  centre he put the soul, which he  diffused throughout the

body, making  it also to be the exterior environment  of it; and he made the universe  a circle moving in a circle,

one and  solitary, yet by reason of its  excellence able to converse with itself, and  needing no other  friendship

or acquaintance.  Having these purposes in view  he created  the world a blessed god. 

Now God did not make the soul after the body, although we are  speaking of  them in this order; for having

brought them together he  would never have  allowed that the elder should be ruled by the  younger; but this is

a random  manner of speaking which we have,  because somehow we ourselves too are very  much under the

dominion of  chance.  Whereas he made the soul in origin and  excellence prior to  and older than the body, to

be the ruler and mistress,  of whom the  body was to be the subject.  And he made her out of the  following

elements and on this wise:  Out of the indivisible and  unchangeable,  and also out of that which is divisible and

has to do with  material  bodies, he compounded a third and intermediate kind of essence,  partaking of the

nature of the same and of the other, and this  compound he  placed accordingly in a mean between the

indivisible, and  the divisible and  material.  He took the three elements of the same,  the other, and the  essence,

and mingled them into one form,  compressing by force the reluctant  and unsociable nature of the other  into

the same.  When he had mingled them  with the essence and out of  three made one, he again divided this

whole  into as many portions as  was fitting, each portion being a compound of the  same, the other, and  the

essence.  And he proceeded to divide after this  manner:First of  all, he took away one part of the whole (1),

and then he  separated a  second part which was double the first (2), and then he took  away a  third part which

was half as much again as the second and three  times  as much as the first (3), and then he took a fourth part

which was  twice as much as the second (4), and a fifth part which was three  times the  third (9), and a sixth

part which was eight times the first  (8), and a  seventh part which was twentyseven times the first (27).  After

this he  filled up the double intervals (i.e. between 1, 2, 4,  8) and the triple  (i.e. between 1, 3, 9, 27) cutting off

yet other  portions from the mixture  and placing them in the intervals, so that  in each interval there were two

kinds of means, the one exceeding and  exceeded by equal parts of its  extremes (as for example 1, 4/3, 2, in

which the mean 4/3 is onethird of 1  more than 1, and onethird of 2  less than 2), the other being that kind of

mean which exceeds and is  exceeded by an equal number (e.g. 

over 1, 4/3, 3/2,  over 2, 8/3, 3,  over 4, 16/3, 6,   over 8: and

over 1, 3/2, 2,    over 3, 9/2, 6,  over 9, 27/2, 18,  over 27.).

Where there were intervals of 3/2 and of 4/3 and of 9/8, made by  the  connecting terms in the former intervals,

he filled up all the  intervals of  4/3 with the interval of 9/8, leaving a fraction over;  and the interval  which this

fraction expressed was in the ratio of 256  to 243 (e.g. 


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 56



Top




Page No 59


243:256::81/64:4/3::243/128:2::81/32:8/3::243/64:4::81/16:16/3::242/32:8.).

And thus the whole mixture out of which he cut these portions was  all  exhausted by him.  This entire

compound he divided lengthways into  two  parts, which he joined to one another at the centre like the  letter X,

and  bent them into a circular form, connecting them with  themselves and each  other at the point opposite to

their original  meetingpoint; and,  comprehending them in a uniform revolution upon  the same axis, he made

the  one the outer and the other the inner  circle.  Now the motion of the outer  circle he called the motion of  the

same, and the motion of the inner circle  the motion of the other  or diverse.  The motion of the same he carried

round by the side (i.e.  of the rectangular figure supposed to be inscribed  in the circle of  the Same) to the right,

and the motion of the diverse  diagonally (i.e.  across the rectangular figure from corner to corner) to  the left.

And  he gave dominion to the motion of the same and like, for  that he left  single and undivided; but the inner

motion he divided in  six places  and made seven unequal circles having their intervals in  ratios of two  and

three, three of each, and bade the orbits proceed in a  direction  opposite to one another; and three (Sun,

Mercury, Venus) he made  to  move with equal swiftness, and the remaining four (Moon, Saturn, Mars,

Jupiter) to move with unequal swiftness to the three and to one  another,  but in due proportion. 

Now when the Creator had framed the soul according to his will, he  formed  within her the corporeal universe,

and brought the two  together, and united  them centre to centre.  The soul, interfused  everywhere from the

centre to  the circumference of heaven, of which  also she is the external envelopment,  herself turning in

herself,  began a divine beginning of neverceasing and  rational life enduring  throughout all time.  The body

of heaven is visible,  but the soul is  invisible, and partakes of reason and harmony, and being  made by the  best

of intellectual and everlasting natures, is the best of  things  created.  And because she is composed of the same

and of the other  and  of the essence, these three, and is divided and united in due  proportion, and in her

revolutions returns upon herself, the soul,  when  touching anything which has essence, whether dispersed in

parts  or  undivided, is stirred through all her powers, to declare the  sameness or  difference of that thing and

some other; and to what  individuals are  related, and by what affected, and in what way and how  and when,

both in  the world of generation and in the world of  immutable being.  And when  reason, which works with

equal truth,  whether she be in the circle of the  diverse or of the samein  voiceless silence holding her

onward course in  the sphere of the  selfmovedwhen reason, I say, is hovering around the  sensible world

and when the circle of the diverse also moving truly imparts  the  intimations of sense to the whole soul, then

arise opinions and beliefs  sure and certain.  But when reason is concerned with the rational, and  the  circle of

the same moving smoothly declares it, then intelligence  and  knowledge are necessarily perfected.  And if any

one affirms that  in which  these two are found to be other than the soul, he will say  the very  opposite of the

truth. 

When the father and creator saw the creature which he had made  moving and  living, the created image of the

eternal gods, he rejoiced,  and in his joy  determined to make the copy still more like the  original; and as this

was  eternal, he sought to make the universe  eternal, so far as might be.  Now  the nature of the ideal being was

everlasting, but to bestow this attribute  in its fulness upon a  creature was impossible.  Wherefore he resolved

to  have a moving image  of eternity, and when he set in order the heaven, he  made this image  eternal but

moving according to number, while eternity  itself rests in  unity; and this image we call time.  For there were

no days  and nights  and months and years before the heaven was created, but when he  constructed the heaven

he created them also.  They are all parts of  time,  and the past and future are created species of time, which we

unconsciously  but wrongly transfer to the eternal essence; for we say  that he 'was,' he  'is,' he 'will be,' but the

truth is that 'is' alone  is properly attributed  to him, and that 'was' and 'will be' are only  to be spoken of

becoming in  time, for they are motions, but that which  is immovably the same cannot  become older or

younger by time, nor ever  did or has become, or hereafter  will be, older or younger, nor is  subject at all to any

of those states  which affect moving and sensible  things and of which generation is the  cause.  These are the

forms of  time, which imitates eternity and revolves  according to a law of  number.  Moreover, when we say

that what has become  IS become and what  becomes IS becoming, and that what will become IS about  to

become and  that the nonexistent IS nonexistentall these are  inaccurate modes  of expression (compare


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 57



Top




Page No 60


Parmen.).  But perhaps this whole  subject will  be more suitably discussed on some other occasion. 

Time, then, and the heaven came into being at the same instant in  order  that, having been created together, if

ever there was to be a  dissolution  of them, they might be dissolved together.  It was framed  after the pattern  of

the eternal nature, that it might resemble this  as far as was possible;  for the pattern exists from eternity, and

the  created heaven has been, and  is, and will be, in all time.  Such was  the mind and thought of God in the

creation of time.  The sun and moon  and five other stars, which are called  the planets, were created by  him in

order to distinguish and preserve the  numbers of time; and when  he had made their several bodies, he placed

them  in the orbits in  which the circle of the other was revolving,in seven  orbits seven  stars.  First, there was

the moon in the orbit nearest the  earth, and  next the sun, in the second orbit above the earth; then came the

morning star and the star sacred to Hermes, moving in orbits which  have an  equal swiftness with the sun, but

in an opposite direction;  and this is the  reason why the sun and Hermes and Lucifer overtake and  are

overtaken by  each other.  To enumerate the places which he  assigned to the other stars,  and to give all the

reasons why he  assigned them, although a secondary  matter, would give more trouble  than the primary.  These

things at some  future time, when we are at  leisure, may have the consideration which they  deserve, but not at

present. 

Now, when all the stars which were necessary to the creation of  time had  attained a motion suitable to them,

and had become living  creatures having  bodies fastened by vital chains, and learnt their  appointed task,

moving in  the motion of the diverse, which is  diagonal, and passes through and is  governed by the motion of

the  same, they revolved, some in a larger and  some in a lesser  orbitthose which had the lesser orbit

revolving faster,  and those  which had the larger more slowly.  Now by reason of the motion of  the  same, those

which revolved fastest appeared to be overtaken by those  which moved slower although they really overtook

them; for the motion  of  the same made them all turn in a spiral, and, because some went one  way and  some

another, that which receded most slowly from the sphere  of the same,  which was the swiftest, appeared to

follow it most  nearly.  That there  might be some visible measure of their relative  swiftness and slowness as

they proceeded in their eight courses, God  lighted a fire, which we now  call the sun, in the second from the

earth of these orbits, that it might  give light to the whole of  heaven, and that the animals, as many as nature

intended, might  participate in number, learning arithmetic from the  revolution of the  same and the like.  Thus

then, and for this reason the  night and the  day were created, being the period of the one most  intelligent

revolution.  And the month is accomplished when the moon has  completed  her orbit and overtaken the sun,

and the year when the sun has  completed his own orbit.  Mankind, with hardly an exception, have not

remarked the periods of the other stars, and they have no name for  them,  and do not measure them against

one another by the help of  number, and  hence they can scarcely be said to know that their  wanderings, being

infinite in number and admirable for their variety,  make up time.  And yet  there is no difficulty in seeing that

the  perfect number of time fulfils  the perfect year when all the eight  revolutions, having their relative  degrees

of swiftness, are  accomplished together and attain their completion  at the same time,  measured by the rotation

of the same and equally moving.  After this  manner, and for these reasons, came into being such of the stars  as

in  their heavenly progress received reversals of motion, to the end that  the created heaven might imitate the

eternal nature, and be as like as  possible to the perfect and intelligible animal. 

Thus far and until the birth of time the created universe was made  in the  likeness of the original, but

inasmuch as all animals were not  yet  comprehended therein, it was still unlike.  What remained, the  creator

then  proceeded to fashion after the nature of the pattern.  Now as in the ideal  animal the mind perceives ideas

or species of a  certain nature and number,  he thought that this created animal ought  to have species of a like

nature  and number.  There are four such; one  of them is the heavenly race of the  gods; another, the race of

birds  whose way is in the air; the third, the  watery species; and the  fourth, the pedestrian and land creatures.

Of the  heavenly and  divine, he created the greater part out of fire, that they  might be  the brightest of all things

and fairest to behold, and he  fashioned  them after the likeness of the universe in the figure of a  circle, and

made them follow the intelligent motion of the supreme,  distributing  them over the whole circumference of

heaven, which was to be a  true  cosmos or glorious world spangled with them all over.  And he gave to  each of


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 58



Top




Page No 61


them two movements:  the first, a movement on the same spot  after  the same manner, whereby they ever

continue to think  consistently the same  thoughts about the same things; the second, a  forward movement, in

which  they are controlled by the revolution of  the same and the like; but by the  other five motions they were

unaffected, in order that each of them might  attain the highest  perfection.  And for this reason the fixed stars

were  created, to be  divine and eternal animals, everabiding and revolving after  the same  manner and on the

same spot; and the other stars which reverse  their  motion and are subject to deviations of this kind, were

created in  the  manner already described.  The earth, which is our nurse, clinging (or  'circling') around the pole

which is extended through the universe, he  framed to be the guardian and artificer of night and day, first and

eldest  of gods that are in the interior of heaven.  Vain would be the  attempt to  tell all the figures of them

circling as in dance, and  their  juxtapositions, and the return of them in their revolutions upon  themselves, and

their approximations, and to say which of these  deities in  their conjunctions meet, and which of them are in

opposition, and in what  order they get behind and before one another,  and when they are severally  eclipsed to

our sight and again reappear,  sending terrors and intimations  of the future to those who cannot  calculate their

movementsto attempt to  tell of all this without a  visible representation of the heavenly system  would be

labour in vain.  Enough on this head; and now let what we have  said about the nature  of the created and

visible gods have an end. 

To know or tell the origin of the other divinities is beyond us,  and we  must accept the traditions of the men of

old time who affirm  themselves to  be the offspring of the godsthat is what they sayand  they must surely

have known their own ancestors.  How can we doubt the  word of the children  of the gods?  Although they give

no probable or  certain proofs, still, as  they declare that they are speaking of what  took place in their own

family,  we must conform to custom and believe  them.  In this manner, then,  according to them, the genealogy

of these  gods is to be received and set  forth. 

Oceanus and Tethys were the children of Earth and Heaven, and from  these  sprang Phorcys and Cronos and

Rhea, and all that generation; and  from  Cronos and Rhea sprang Zeus and Here, and all those who are said  to

be  their brethren, and others who were the children of these. 

Now, when all of them, both those who visibly appear in their  revolutions  as well as those other gods who are

of a more retiring  nature, had come  into being, the creator of the universe addressed  them in these words:

'Gods, children of gods, who are my works, and of  whom I am the artificer  and father, my creations are

indissoluble, if  so I will.  All that is bound  may be undone, but only an evil being  would wish to undo that

which is  harmonious and happy.  Wherefore,  since ye are but creatures, ye are not  altogether immortal and

indissoluble, but ye shall certainly not be  dissolved, nor be liable  to the fate of death, having in my will a

greater  and mightier bond  than those with which ye were bound at the time of your  birth.  And  now listen to

my instructions:Three tribes of mortal beings  remain  to be createdwithout them the universe will be

incomplete, for it  will not contain every kind of animal which it ought to contain, if it  is  to be perfect.  On the

other hand, if they were created by me and  received  life at my hands, they would be on an equality with the

gods.  In order  then that they may be mortal, and that this universe may be  truly  universal, do ye, according to

your natures, betake yourselves  to the  formation of animals, imitating the power which was shown by me  in

creating  you.  The part of them worthy of the name immortal, which  is called divine  and is the guiding

principle of those who are willing  to follow justice and  youof that divine part I will myself sow the  seed,

and having made a  beginning, I will hand the work over to you.  And do ye then interweave the  mortal with

the immortal, and make and  beget living creatures, and give  them food, and make them to grow, and  receive

them again in death.' 

Thus he spake, and once more into the cup in which he had  previously  mingled the soul of the universe he

poured the remains of  the elements, and  mingled them in much the same manner; they were not,  however,

pure as  before, but diluted to the second and third degree.  And having made it he  divided the whole mixture

into souls equal in  number to the stars, and  assigned each soul to a star; and having  there placed them as in a

chariot,  he showed them the nature of the  universe, and declared to them the laws of  destiny, according to


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 59



Top




Page No 62


which  their first birth would be one and the same for  all,no one should  suffer a disadvantage at his hands;

they were to be  sown in the  instruments of time severally adapted to them, and to come  forth the  most

religious of animals; and as human nature was of two kinds,  the  superior race would hereafter be called man.

Now, when they should be  implanted in bodies by necessity, and be always gaining or losing some  part  of

their bodily substance, then in the first place it would be  necessary  that they should all have in them one and

the same faculty  of sensation,  arising out of irresistible impressions; in the second  place, they must  have love,

in which pleasure and pain mingle; also  fear and anger, and the  feelings which are akin or opposite to them;  if

they conquered these they  would live righteously, and if they were  conquered by them, unrighteously.  He

who lived well during his  appointed time was to return and dwell in his  native star, and there  he would have a

blessed and congenial existence.  But if he failed in  attaining this, at the second birth he would pass into  a

woman, and  if, when in that state of being, he did not desist from evil,  he would  continually be changed into

some brute who resembled him in the  evil  nature which he had acquired, and would not cease from his toils

and  transformations until he followed the revolution of the same and the  like  within him, and overcame by

the help of reason the turbulent and  irrational  mob of later accretions, made up of fire and air and water  and

earth, and  returned to the form of his first and better state.  Having given all these  laws to his creatures, that he

might be  guiltless of future evil in any of  them, the creator sowed some of  them in the earth, and some in the

moon,  and some in the other  instruments of time; and when he had sown them he  committed to the  younger

gods the fashioning of their mortal bodies, and  desired them  to furnish what was still lacking to the human

soul, and  having made  all the suitable additions, to rule over them, and to pilot the  mortal  animal in the best

and wisest manner which they could, and avert  from  him all but selfinflicted evils. 

When the creator had made all these ordinances he remained in his  own  accustomed nature, and his children

heard and were obedient to  their  father's word, and receiving from him the immortal principle of  a mortal

creature, in imitation of their own creator they borrowed  portions of fire,  and earth, and water, and air from

the world, which  were hereafter to be  restoredthese they took and welded them  together, not with the

indissoluble chains by which they were  themselves bound, but with little  pegs too small to be visible, making

up out of all the four elements each  separate body, and fastening the  courses of the immortal soul in a body

which was in a state of  perpetual influx and efflux.  Now these courses,  detained as in a vast  river, neither

overcame nor were overcome; but were  hurrying and  hurried to and fro, so that the whole animal was moved

and  progressed,  irregularly however and irrationally and anyhow, in all the six  directions of motion,

wandering backwards and forwards, and right and  left,  and up and down, and in all the six directions.  For

great as  was the  advancing and retiring flood which provided nourishment, the  affections  produced by

external contact caused still greater  tumultwhen the body of  any one met and came into collision with

some  external fire, or with the  solid earth or the gliding waters, or was  caught in the tempest borne on  the air,

and the motions produced by  any of these impulses were carried  through the body to the soul.  All  such

motions have consequently received  the general name of  'sensations,' which they still retain.  And they did in

fact at that  time create a very great and mighty movement; uniting with the  everflowing stream in stirring up

and violently shaking the courses  of the  soul, they completely stopped the revolution of the same by  their

opposing  current, and hindered it from predominating and  advancing; and they so  disturbed the nature of the

other or diverse,  that the three double  intervals (i.e. between 1, 2, 4, 8), and the  three triple intervals (i.e.

between 1, 3, 9, 27), together with the  mean terms and connecting links  which are expressed by the ratios of

3:2, and 4:3, and of 9:8these,  although they cannot be wholly undone  except by him who united them,

were  twisted by them in all sorts of  ways, and the circles were broken and  disordered in every possible

manner, so that when they moved they were  tumbling to pieces, and  moved irrationally, at one time in a

reverse  direction, and then again  obliquely, and then upside down, as you might  imagine a person who is

upside down and has his head leaning upon the  ground and his feet up  against something in the air; and when

he is in such  a position, both  he and the spectator fancy that the right of either is his  left, and  the left right.  If,

when powerfully experiencing these and  similar  effects, the revolutions of the soul come in contact with

some  external thing, either of the class of the same or of the other, they  speak  of the same or of the other in a

manner the very opposite of the  truth; and  they become false and foolish, and there is no course or  revolution

in them  which has a guiding or directing power; and if  again any sensations enter  in violently from without


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 60



Top




Page No 63


and drag after  them the whole vessel of the soul,  then the courses of the soul,  though they seem to conquer,

are really  conquered. 

And by reason of all these affections, the soul, when encased in a  mortal  body, now, as in the beginning, is at

first without  intelligence; but when  the flood of growth and nutriment abates, and  the courses of the soul,

calming down, go their own way and become  steadier as time goes on, then  the several circles return to their

natural form, and their revolutions are  corrected, and they call the  same and the other by their right names,

and  make the possessor of  them to become a rational being.  And if these  combine in him with any  true

nurture or education, he attains the fulness  and health of the  perfect man, and escapes the worst disease of all;

but if  he neglects  education he walks lame to the end of his life, and returns  imperfect  and good for nothing to

the world below.  This, however, is a  later  stage; at present we must treat more exactly the subject before us,

which involves a preliminary enquiry into the generation of the body  and  its members, and as to how the soul

was createdfor what reason  and by  what providence of the gods; and holding fast to probability,  we must

pursue our way. 

First, then, the gods, imitating the spherical shape of the  universe,  enclosed the two divine courses in a

spherical body, that,  namely, which we  now term the head, being the most divine part of us  and the lord of all

that is in us:  to this the gods, when they put  together the body, gave all  the other members to be servants,

considering that it partook of every sort  of motion.  In order then  that it might not tumble about among the

high and  deep places of the  earth, but might be able to get over the one and out of  the other,  they provided the

body to be its vehicle and means of  locomotion;  which consequently had length and was furnished with four

limbs  extended and flexible; these God contrived to be instruments of  locomotion  with which it might take

hold and find support, and so be  able to pass  through all places, carrying on high the dwellingplace  of the

most sacred  and divine part of us.  Such was the origin of legs  and hands, which for  this reason were attached

to every man; and the  gods, deeming the front  part of man to be more honourable and more fit  to command

than the hinder  part, made us to move mostly in a forward  direction.  Wherefore man must  needs have his

front part unlike and  distinguished from the rest of his  body. 

And so in the vessel of the head, they first of all put a face in  which  they inserted organs to minister in all

things to the providence  of the  soul, and they appointed this part, which has authority, to be  by nature  the part

which is in front.  And of the organs they first  contrived the  eyes to give light, and the principle according to

which  they were inserted  was as follows:  So much of fire as would not burn,  but gave a gentle  light, they

formed into a substance akin to the  light of everyday life;  and the pure fire which is within us and  related

thereto they made to flow  through the eyes in a stream smooth  and dense, compressing the whole eye,  and

especially the centre part,  so that it kept out everything of a coarser  nature, and allowed to  pass only this pure

element.  When the light of day  surrounds the  stream of vision, then like falls upon like, and they  coalesce,

and  one body is formed by natural affinity in the line of vision,  wherever  the light that falls from within

meets with an external object.  And  the whole stream of vision, being similarly affected in virtue of  similarity,

diffuses the motions of what it touches or what touches it  over  the whole body, until they reach the soul,

causing that  perception which we  call sight.  But when night comes on and the  external and kindred fire

departs, then the stream of vision is cut  off; for going forth to an unlike  element it is changed and

extinguished, being no longer of one nature with  the surrounding  atmosphere which is now deprived of fire:

and so the eye  no longer  sees, and we feel disposed to sleep.  For when the eyelids, which  the  gods invented

for the preservation of sight, are closed, they keep in  the internal fire; and the power of the fire diffuses and

equalizes  the  inward motions; when they are equalized, there is rest, and when  the rest  is profound, sleep

comes over us scarce disturbed by dreams;  but where the  greater motions still remain, of whatever nature and

in  whatever locality,  they engender corresponding visions in dreams,  which are remembered by us  when we

are awake and in the external  world.  And now there is no longer  any difficulty in understanding the  creation

of images in mirrors and all  smooth and bright surfaces.  For  from the communion of the internal and  external

fires, and again from  the union of them and their numerous  transformations when they meet in  the mirror, all

these appearances of  necessity arise, when the fire  from the face coalesces with the fire from  the eye on the


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 61



Top




Page No 64


bright and  smooth surface.  And right appears left and left  right, because the  visual rays come into contact

with the rays emitted by  the object in a  manner contrary to the usual mode of meeting; but the right  appears

right, and the left left, when the position of one of the two  concurring lights is reversed; and this happens

when the mirror is  concave  and its smooth surface repels the right stream of vision to  the left side,  and the left

to the right (He is speaking of two kinds  of mirrors, first  the plane, secondly the concave; and the latter is

supposed to be placed,  first horizontally, and then vertically.).  Or  if the mirror be turned  vertically, then the

concavity makes the  countenance appear to be all  upside down, and the lower rays are  driven upwards and

the upper downwards. 

All these are to be reckoned among the second and cooperative  causes which  God, carrying into execution

the idea of the best as far  as possible, uses  as his ministers.  They are thought by most men not  to be the

second, but  the prime causes of all things, because they  freeze and heat, and contract  and dilate, and the like.

But they are  not so, for they are incapable of  reason or intellect; the only being  which can properly have mind

is the  invisible soul, whereas fire and  water, and earth and air, are all of them  visible bodies.  The lover  of

intellect and knowledge ought to explore  causes of intelligent  nature first of all, and, secondly, of those things

which, being moved  by others, are compelled to move others.  And this is  what we too must  do.  Both kinds of

causes should be acknowledged by us,  but a  distinction should be made between those which are endowed

with mind  and are the workers of things fair and good, and those which are  deprived  of intelligence and

always produce chance effects without  order or design.  Of the second or cooperative causes of sight, which

help to give to the  eyes the power which they now possess, enough has  been said.  I will  therefore now

proceed to speak of the higher use  and purpose for which God  has given them to us.  The sight in my  opinion

is the source of the  greatest benefit to us, for had we never  seen the stars, and the sun, and  the heaven, none of

the words which  we have spoken about the universe would  ever have been uttered.  But  now the sight of day

and night, and the months  and the revolutions of  the years, have created number, and have given us a

conception of  time, and the power of enquiring about the nature of the  universe; and  from this source we have

derived philosophy, than which no  greater  good ever was or will be given by the gods to mortal man.  This is

the  greatest boon of sight:  and of the lesser benefits why should I speak?  even the ordinary man if he were

deprived of them would bewail his  loss,  but in vain.  Thus much let me say however:  God invented and  gave

us sight  to the end that we might behold the courses of  intelligence in the heaven,  and apply them to the

courses of our own  intelligence which are akin to  them, the unperturbed to the perturbed;  and that we,

learning them and  partaking of the natural truth of  reason, might imitate the absolutely  unerring courses of

God and  regulate our own vagaries.  The same may be  affirmed of speech and  hearing:  they have been given

by the gods to the  same end and for a  like reason.  For this is the principal end of speech,  whereto it most

contributes.  Moreover, so much of music as is adapted to  the sound of  the voice and to the sense of hearing is

granted to us for the  sake of  harmony; and harmony, which has motions akin to the revolutions of  our  souls,

is not regarded by the intelligent votary of the Muses as given  by them with a view to irrational pleasure,

which is deemed to be the  purpose of it in our day, but as meant to correct any discord which  may  have arisen

in the courses of the soul, and to be our ally in  bringing her  into harmony and agreement with herself; and

rhythm too  was given by them  for the same reason, on account of the irregular and  graceless ways which

prevail among mankind generally, and to help us  against them. 

Thus far in what we have been saying, with small exception, the  works of  intelligence have been set forth;

and now we must place by  the side of them  in our discourse the things which come into being  through

necessityfor  the creation is mixed, being made up of  necessity and mind.  Mind, the  ruling power,

persuaded necessity to  bring the greater part of created  things to perfection, and thus and  after this manner in

the beginning, when  the influence of reason got  the better of necessity, the universe was  created.  But if a

person  will truly tell of the way in which the work was  accomplished, he must  include the other influence of

the variable cause as  well.  Wherefore,  we must return again and find another suitable beginning,  as about the

former matters, so also about these.  To which end we must  consider  the nature of fire, and water, and air, and

earth, such as they  were  prior to the creation of the heaven, and what was happening to them in  this previous

state; for no one has as yet explained the manner of  their  generation, but we speak of fire and the rest of them,


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 62



Top




Page No 65


whatever  they mean,  as though men knew their natures, and we maintain them to  be the first  principles and

letters or elements of the whole, when  they cannot  reasonably be compared by a man of any sense even to

syllables or first  compounds.  And let me say thus much:  I will not  now speak of the first  principle or

principles of all things, or by  whatever name they are to be  called, for this reasonbecause it is  difficult to

set forth my opinion  according to the method of  discussion which we are at present employing.  Do not

imagine, any more  than I can bring myself to imagine, that I should  be right in  undertaking so great and

difficult a task.  Remembering what I  said at  first about probability, I will do my best to give as probable an

explanation as any otheror rather, more probable; and I will first  go  back to the beginning and try to speak

of each thing and of all.  Once  more, then, at the commencement of my discourse, I call upon  God, and beg

him to be our saviour out of a strange and unwonted  enquiry, and to bring  us to the haven of probability.  So

now let us  begin again. 

This new beginning of our discussion of the universe requires a  fuller  division than the former; for then we

made two classes, now a  third must be  revealed.  The two sufficed for the former discussion:  one, which we

assumed, was a pattern intelligible and always the  same; and the second was  only the imitation of the pattern,

generated  and visible.  There is also a  third kind which we did not distinguish  at the time, conceiving that the

two would be enough.  But now the  argument seems to require that we should  set forth in words another  kind,

which is difficult of explanation and  dimly seen.  What nature  are we to attribute to this new kind of being?

We  reply, that it is  the receptacle, and in a manner the nurse, of all  generation.  I have  spoken the truth; but I

must express myself in clearer  language, and  this will be an arduous task for many reasons, and in  particular

because I must first raise questions concerning fire and the  other  elements, and determine what each of them

is; for to say, with any  probability or certitude, which of them should be called water rather  than  fire, and

which should be called any of them rather than all or  some one of  them, is a difficult matter.  How, then, shall

we settle  this point, and  what questions about the elements may be fairly  raised? 

In the first place, we see that what we just now called water, by  condensation, I suppose, becomes stone and

earth; and this same  element,  when melted and dispersed, passes into vapour and air.  Air,  again, when

inflamed, becomes fire; and again fire, when condensed and  extinguished,  passes once more into the form of

air; and once more,  air, when collected  and condensed, produces cloud and mist; and from  these, when still

more  compressed, comes flowing water, and from water  comes earth and stones once  more; and thus

generation appears to be  transmitted from one to the other  in a circle.  Thus, then, as the  several elements

never present themselves  in the same form, how can  any one have the assurance to assert positively  that any

of them,  whatever it may be, is one thing rather than another?  No  one can.  But much the safest plan is to

speak of them as follows:  Anything  which we see to be continually changing, as, for example, fire, we

must not call 'this' or 'that,' but rather say that it is 'of such a  nature'; nor let us speak of water as 'this'; but

always as 'such';  nor  must we imply that there is any stability in any of those things  which we  indicate by the

use of the words 'this' and 'that,' supposing  ourselves to  signify something thereby; for they are too volatile to

be detained in any  such expressions as 'this,' or 'that,' or 'relative  to this,' or any other  mode of speaking which

represents them as  permanent.  We ought not to apply  'this' to any of them, but rather  the word 'such'; which

expresses the  similar principle circulating in  each and all of them; for example, that  should be called 'fire'

which  is of such a nature always, and so of  everything that has generation.  That in which the elements

severally grow  up, and appear, and decay,  is alone to be called by the name 'this' or  'that'; but that which is  of

a certain nature, hot or white, or anything  which admits of  opposite qualities, and all things that are

compounded of  them, ought  not to be so denominated.  Let me make another attempt to  explain my  meaning

more clearly.  Suppose a person to make all kinds of  figures  of gold and to be always transmuting one form

into all the rest;  somebody points to one of them and asks what it is.  By far the safest  and  truest answer is,

That is gold; and not to call the triangle or  any other  figures which are formed in the gold 'these,' as though

they  had existence,  since they are in process of change while he is making  the assertion; but  if the questioner

be willing to take the safe and  indefinite expression,  'such,' we should be satisfied.  And the same  argument

applies to the  universal nature which receives all  bodiesthat must be always called the  same; for, while

receiving all  things, she never departs at all from her  own nature, and never in any  way, or at any time,


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 63



Top




Page No 66


assumes a form like that  of any of the things  which enter into her; she is the natural recipient of  all

impressions,  and is stirred and informed by them, and appears different  from time  to time by reason of them.

But the forms which enter into and go  out  of her are the likenesses of real existences modelled after their

patterns in a wonderful and inexplicable manner, which we will  hereafter  investigate.  For the present we have

only to conceive of  three natures:  first, that which is in process of generation;  secondly, that in which the

generation takes place; and thirdly, that  of which the thing generated is a  resemblance.  And we may liken the

receiving principle to a mother, and the  source or spring to a father,  and the intermediate nature to a child;

and  may remark further, that  if the model is to take every variety of form,  then the matter in  which the model

is fashioned will not be duly prepared,  unless it is  formless, and free from the impress of any of those shapes

which it is  hereafter to receive from without.  For if the matter were like  any of  the supervening forms, then

whenever any opposite or entirely  different nature was stamped upon its surface, it would take the  impression

badly, because it would intrude its own shape.  Wherefore,  that which is to  receive all forms should have no

form; as in making  perfumes they first  contrive that the liquid substance which is to  receive the scent shall be

as inodorous as possible; or as those who  wish to impress figures on soft  substances do not allow any

previous  impression to remain, but begin by  making the surface as even and  smooth as possible.  In the same

way that  which is to receive  perpetually and through its whole extent the  resemblances of all  eternal beings

ought to be devoid of any particular  form.  Wherefore,  the mother and receptacle of all created and visible and

in any way  sensible things, is not to be termed earth, or air, or fire, or  water,  or any of their compounds or any

of the elements from which these  are  derived, but is an invisible and formless being which receives all  things

and in some mysterious way partakes of the intelligible, and is  most  incomprehensible.  In saying this we shall

not be far wrong; as  far,  however, as we can attain to a knowledge of her from the previous  considerations,

we may truly say that fire is that part of her nature  which  from time to time is inflamed, and water that which

is  moistened, and that  the mother substance becomes earth and air, in so  far as she receives the  impressions of

them. 

Let us consider this question more precisely.  Is there any  selfexistent  fire? and do all those things which we

call  selfexistent exist? or are  only those things which we see, or in some  way perceive through the bodily

organs, truly existent, and nothing  whatever besides them?  And is all that  which we call an intelligible

essence nothing at all, and only a name?  Here is a question which we  must not leave unexamined or

undetermined, nor  must we affirm too  confidently that there can be no decision; neither must  we interpolate

in our present long discourse a digression equally long, but  if it is  possible to set forth a great principle in a

few words, that is  just  what we want. 

Thus I state my view:If mind and true opinion are two distinct  classes,  then I say that there certainly are

these selfexistent ideas  unperceived  by sense, and apprehended only by the mind; if, however,  as some say,

true  opinion differs in no respect from mind, then  everything that we perceive  through the body is to be

regarded as most  real and certain.  But we must  affirm them to be distinct, for they  have a distinct origin and

are of a  different nature; the one is  implanted in us by instruction, the other by  persuasion; the one is  always

accompanied by true reason, the other is  without reason; the  one cannot be overcome by persuasion, but the

other  can:  and lastly,  every man may be said to share in true opinion, but mind  is the  attribute of the gods and

of very few men.  Wherefore also we must  acknowledge that there is one kind of being which is always the

same,  uncreated and indestructible, never receiving anything into itself  from  without, nor itself going out to

any other, but invisible and  imperceptible  by any sense, and of which the contemplation is granted  to

intelligence  only.  And there is another nature of the same name  with it, and like to  it, perceived by sense,

created, always in  motion, becoming in place and  again vanishing out of place, which is  apprehended by

opinion and sense.  And there is a third nature, which  is space, and is eternal, and admits not  of destruction

and provides a  home for all created things, and is  apprehended without the help of  sense, by a kind of

spurious reason, and is  hardly real; which we  beholding as in a dream, say of all existence that it  must of

necessity be in some place and occupy a space, but that what is  neither in heaven nor in earth has no

existence.  Of these and other  things  of the same kind, relating to the true and waking reality of  nature, we

have only this dreamlike sense, and we are unable to cast  off sleep and  determine the truth about them.  For an


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 64



Top




Page No 67


image, since the  reality, after  which it is modelled, does not belong to it, and it  exists ever as the  fleeting

shadow of some other, must be inferred to  be in another (i.e. in  space), grasping existence in some way or

other, or it could not be at all.  But true and exact reason,  vindicating the nature of true being, maintains  that

while two things  (i.e. the image and space) are different they cannot  exist one of them  in the other and so be

one and also two at the same time. 

Thus have I concisely given the result of my thoughts; and my  verdict is  that being and space and generation,

these three, existed  in their three  ways before the heaven; and that the nurse of  generation, moistened by

water and inflamed by fire, and receiving the  forms of earth and air, and  experiencing all the affections which

accompany these, presented a strange  variety of appearances; and being  full of powers which were neither

similar  nor equally balanced, was  never in any part in a state of equipoise, but  swaying unevenly hither  and

thither, was shaken by them, and by its motion  again shook them;  and the elements when moved were

separated and carried  continually,  some one way, some another; as, when grain is shaken and  winnowed by

fans and other instruments used in the threshing of corn, the  close  and heavy particles are borne away and

settle in one direction, and  the loose and light particles in another.  In this manner, the four  kinds  or elements

were then shaken by the receiving vessel, which,  moving like a  winnowing machine, scattered far away from

one another  the elements most  unlike, and forced the most similar elements into  close contact.  Wherefore

also the various elements had different  places before they were arranged so  as to form the universe.  At  first,

they were all without reason and  measure.  But when the world  began to get into order, fire and water and

earth and air had only  certain faint traces of themselves, and were  altogether such as  everything might be

expected to be in the absence of  God; this, I say,  was their nature at that time, and God fashioned them by

form and  number.  Let it be consistently maintained by us in all that we  say  that God made them as far as

possible the fairest and best, out of  things which were not fair and good.  And now I will endeavour to show

you  the disposition and generation of them by an unaccustomed  argument, which I  am compelled to use; but I

believe that you will be  able to follow me, for  your education has made you familiar with the  methods of

science. 

In the first place, then, as is evident to all, fire and earth and  water  and air are bodies.  And every sort of body

possesses solidity,  and every  solid must necessarily be contained in planes; and every  plane rectilinear  figure

is composed of triangles; and all triangles  are originally of two  kinds, both of which are made up of one right

and two acute angles; one of  them has at either end of the base the  half of a divided right angle,  having equal

sides, while in the other  the right angle is divided into  unequal parts, having unequal sides.  These, then,

proceeding by a  combination of probability with  demonstration, we assume to be the original  elements of fire

and the  other bodies; but the principles which are prior  to these God only  knows, and he of men who is the

friend of God.  And next  we have to  determine what are the four most beautiful bodies which are  unlike one

another, and of which some are capable of resolution into one  another;  for having discovered thus much, we

shall know the true origin of  earth and fire and of the proportionate and intermediate elements.  And  then we

shall not be willing to allow that there are any distinct  kinds of  visible bodies fairer than these.  Wherefore we

must  endeavour to construct  the four forms of bodies which excel in beauty,  and then we shall be able  to say

that we have sufficiently apprehended  their nature.  Now of the two  triangles, the isosceles has one form  only;

the scalene or unequalsided  has an infinite number.  Of the  infinite forms we must select the most  beautiful,

if we are to proceed  in due order, and any one who can point out  a more beautiful form than  ours for the

construction of these bodies, shall  carry off the palm,  not as an enemy, but as a friend.  Now, the one which

we maintain to  be the most beautiful of all the many triangles (and we need  not speak  of the others) is that of

which the double forms a third triangle  which is equilateral; the reason of this would be long to tell; he who

disproves what we are saying, and shows that we are mistaken, may  claim a  friendly victory.  Then let us

choose two triangles, out of  which fire and  the other elements have been constructed, one  isosceles, the other

having  the square of the longer side equal to  three times the square of the lesser  side. 

Now is the time to explain what was before obscurely said:  there  was an  error in imagining that all the four

elements might be  generated by and  into one another; this, I say, was an erroneous  supposition, for there are


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 65



Top




Page No 68


generated from the triangles which we have  selected four kindsthree from  the one which has the sides

unequal;  the fourth alone is framed out of the  isosceles triangle.  Hence they  cannot all be resolved into one

another, a  great number of small  bodies being combined into a few large ones, or the  converse.  But  three of

them can be thus resolved and compounded, for they  all spring  from one, and when the greater bodies are

broken up, many small  bodies  will spring up out of them and take their own proper figures; or,  again, when

many small bodies are dissolved into their triangles, if  they  become one, they will form one large mass of

another kind.  So  much for  their passage into one another.  I have now to speak of their  several  kinds, and

show out of what combinations of numbers each of  them was  formed.  The first will be the simplest and

smallest  construction, and its  element is that triangle which has its  hypotenuse twice the lesser side.  When

two such triangles are joined  at the diagonal, and this is repeated  three times, and the triangles  rest their

diagonals and shorter sides on  the same point as a centre,  a single equilateral triangle is formed out of  six

triangles; and four  equilateral triangles, if put together, make out of  every three plane  angles one solid angle,

being that which is nearest to  the most obtuse  of plane angles; and out of the combination of these four  angles

arises the first solid form which distributes into equal and similar  parts the whole circle in which it is

inscribed.  The second species  of  solid is formed out of the same triangles, which unite as eight  equilateral

triangles and form one solid angle out of four plane  angles, and out of six  such angles the second body is

completed.  And  the third body is made up of  120 triangular elements, forming twelve  solid angles, each of

them included  in five plane equilateral  triangles, having altogether twenty bases, each  of which is an

equilateral triangle.  The one element (that is, the  triangle which  has its hypotenuse twice the lesser side)

having generated  these  figures, generated no more; but the isosceles triangle produced the  fourth elementary

figure, which is compounded of four such triangles,  joining their right angles in a centre, and forming one

equilateral  quadrangle.  Six of these united form eight solid angles, each of  which is  made by the combination

of three plane right angles; the  figure of the body  thus composed is a cube, having six plane  quadrangular

equilateral bases.  There was yet a fifth combination  which God used in the delineation of the  universe. 

Now, he who, duly reflecting on all this, enquires whether the  worlds are  to be regarded as indefinite or

definite in number, will be  of opinion that  the notion of their indefiniteness is characteristic  of a sadly

indefinite  and ignorant mind.  He, however, who raises the  question whether they are  to be truly regarded as

one or five, takes  up a more reasonable position.  Arguing from probabilities, I am of  opinion that they are

one; another,  regarding the question from  another point of view, will be of another mind.  But, leaving this

enquiry, let us proceed to distribute the elementary  forms, which have  now been created in idea, among the

four elements. 

To earth, then, let us assign the cubical form; for earth is the  most  immoveable of the four and the most

plastic of all bodies, and  that which  has the most stable bases must of necessity be of such a  nature.  Now, of

the triangles which we assumed at first, that which  has two equal sides is  by nature more firmly based than

that which has  unequal sides; and of the  compound figures which are formed out of  either, the plane

equilateral  quadrangle has necessarily a more stable  basis than the equilateral  triangle, both in the whole and

in the  parts.  Wherefore, in assigning this  figure to earth, we adhere to  probability; and to water we assign that

one  of the remaining forms  which is the least moveable; and the most moveable  of them to fire;  and to air that

which is intermediate.  Also we assign the  smallest  body to fire, and the greatest to water, and the intermediate

in  size  to air; and, again, the acutest body to fire, and the next in  acuteness to air, and the third to water.  Of all

these elements, that  which has the fewest bases must necessarily be the most moveable, for  it  must be the

acutest and most penetrating in every way, and also the  lightest as being composed of the smallest number of

similar  particles:  and the second body has similar properties in a second  degree, and the  third body in the

third degree.  Let it be agreed,  then, both according to  strict reason and according to probability,  that the

pyramid is the solid  which is the original element and seed  of fire; and let us assign the  element which was

next in the order of  generation to air, and the third to  water.  We must imagine all these  to be so small that no

single particle of  any of the four kinds is  seen by us on account of their smallness:  but  when many of them

are  collected together their aggregates are seen.  And  the ratios of their  numbers, motions, and other

properties, everywhere God,  as far as  necessity allowed or gave consent, has exactly perfected, and


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 66



Top




Page No 69


harmonized in due proportion. 

From all that we have just been saying about the elements or kinds,  the  most probable conclusion is as

follows:earth, when meeting with  fire and  dissolved by its sharpness, whether the dissolution take  place in

the fire  itself or perhaps in some mass of air or water, is  borne hither and  thither, until its parts, meeting

together and  mutually harmonising, again  become earth; for they can never take any  other form.  But water,

when  divided by fire or by air, on reforming,  may become one part fire and two  parts air; and a single

volume of air  divided becomes two of fire.  Again,  when a small body of fire is  contained in a larger body of

air or water or  earth, and both are  moving, and the fire struggling is overcome and broken  up, then two

volumes of fire form one volume of air; and when air is  overcome and  cut up into small pieces, two and a half

parts of air are  condensed  into one part of water.  Let us consider the matter in another  way.  When one of the

other elements is fastened upon by fire, and is cut  by the sharpness of its angles and sides, it coalesces with

the fire,  and  then ceases to be cut by them any longer.  For no element which is  one and  the same with itself

can be changed by or change another of  the same kind  and in the same state.  But so long as in the process of

transition the  weaker is fighting against the stronger, the  dissolution continues.  Again,  when a few small

particles, enclosed in  many larger ones, are in process of  decomposition and extinction, they  only cease from

their tendency to  extinction when they consent to pass  into the conquering nature, and fire  becomes air and

air water.  But  if bodies of another kind go and attack  them (i.e. the small  particles), the latter continue to be

dissolved until,  being  completely forced back and dispersed, they make their escape to their  own kindred, or

else, being overcome and assimilated to the conquering  power, they remain where they are and dwell with

their victors, and  from  being many become one.  And owing to these affections, all things  are  changing their

place, for by the motion of the receiving vessel  the bulk of  each class is distributed into its proper place; but

those  things which  become unlike themselves and like other things, are  hurried by the shaking  into the place

of the things to which they grow  like. 

Now all unmixed and primary bodies are produced by such causes as  these.  As to the subordinate species

which are included in the greater  kinds, they  are to be attributed to the varieties in the structure of  the two

original  triangles.  For either structure did not originally  produce the triangle of  one size only, but some larger

and some  smaller, and there are as many  sizes as there are species of the four  elements.  Hence when they are

mingled with themselves and with one  another there is an endless variety of  them, which those who would

arrive at the probable truth of nature ought  duly to consider. 

Unless a person comes to an understanding about the nature and  conditions  of rest and motion, he will meet

with many difficulties in  the discussion  which follows.  Something has been said of this matter  already, and

something more remains to be said, which is, that motion  never exists in  what is uniform.  For to conceive that

anything can be  moved without a  mover is hard or indeed impossible, and equally  impossible to conceive that

there can be a mover unless there be  something which can be movedmotion  cannot exist where either of

these are wanting, and for these to be uniform  is impossible;  wherefore we must assign rest to uniformity and

motion to  the want of  uniformity.  Now inequality is the cause of the nature which is  wanting in uniformity;

and of this we have already described the  origin.  But there still remains the further pointwhy things when

divided after  their kinds do not cease to pass through one another and  to change their  placewhich we will

now proceed to explain.  In the  revolution of the  universe are comprehended all the four elements, and  this

being circular  and having a tendency to come together, compresses  everything and will not  allow any place to

be left void.  Wherefore,  also, fire above all things  penetrates everywhere, and air next, as  being next in rarity

of the  elements; and the two other elements in  like manner penetrate according to  their degrees of rarity.  For

those  things which are composed of the  largest particles have the largest  void left in their compositions, and

those which are composed of the  smallest particles have the least.  And the  contraction caused by the

compression thrusts the smaller particles into  the interstices of the  larger.  And thus, when the small parts are

placed  side by side with  the larger, and the lesser divide the greater and the  greater unite  the lesser, all the

elements are borne up and down and hither  and  thither towards their own places; for the change in the size of

each  changes its position in space.  And these causes generate an  inequality  which is always maintained, and


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 67



Top




Page No 70


is continually creating a  perpetual motion  of the elements in all time. 

In the next place we have to consider that there are divers kinds  of fire.  There are, for example, first, flame;

and secondly, those  emanations of  flame which do not burn but only give light to the eyes;  thirdly, the

remains of fire, which are seen in redhot embers after  the flame has been  extinguished.  There are similar

differences in the  air; of which the  brightest part is called the aether, and the most  turbid sort mist and

darkness; and there are various other nameless  kinds which arise from the  inequality of the triangles.  Water,

again,  admits in the first place of a  division into two kinds; the one liquid  and the other fusile.  The liquid  kind

is composed of the small and  unequal particles of water; and moves  itself and is moved by other  bodies

owing to the want of uniformity and the  shape of its particles;  whereas the fusile kind, being formed of large

and  uniform particles,  is more stable than the other, and is heavy and compact  by reason of  its uniformity.

But when fire gets in and dissolves the  particles and  destroys the uniformity, it has greater mobility, and

becoming fluid  is thrust forth by the neighbouring air and spreads upon the  earth;  and this dissolution of the

solid masses is called melting, and  their  spreading out upon the earth flowing.  Again, when the fire goes out

of the fusile substance, it does not pass into a vacuum, but into the  neighbouring air; and the air which is

displaced forces together the  liquid  and still moveable mass into the place which was occupied by  the fire,

and  unites it with itself.  Thus compressed the mass resumes  its equability,  and is again at unity with itself,

because the fire  which was the author of  the inequality has retreated; and this  departure of the fire is called

cooling, and the coming together which  follows upon it is termed  congealment.  Of all the kinds termed  fusile,

that which is the densest and  is formed out of the finest and  most uniform parts is that most precious

possession called gold, which  is hardened by filtration through rock; this  is unique in kind, and  has both a

glittering and a yellow colour.  A shoot  of gold, which is  so dense as to be very hard, and takes a black colour,

is  termed  adamant.  There is also another kind which has parts nearly like  gold,  and of which there are several

species; it is denser than gold, and  it  contains a small and fine portion of earth, and is therefore harder,  yet

also lighter because of the great interstices which it has within  itself;  and this substance, which is one of the

bright and denser  kinds of water,  when solidified is called copper.  There is an alloy  of earth mingled with  it,

which, when the two parts grow old and are  disunited, shows itself  separately and is called rust.  The

remaining  phenomena of the same kind  there will be no difficulty in reasoning  out by the method of

probabilities.  A man may sometimes set aside  meditations about eternal  things, and for recreation turn to

consider  the truths of generation which  are probable only; he will thus gain a  pleasure not to be repented of,

and  secure for himself while he lives  a wise and moderate pastime.  Let us  grant ourselves this indulgence,

and go through the probabilities relating  to the same subjects which  follow next in order. 

Water which is mingled with fire, so much as is fine and liquid  (being so  called by reason of its motion and

the way in which it rolls  along the  ground), and soft, because its bases give way and are less  stable than  those

of earth, when separated from fire and air and  isolated, becomes more  uniform, and by their retirement is

compressed  into itself; and if the  condensation be very great, the water above  the earth becomes hail, but on

the earth, ice; and that which is  congealed in a less degree and is only  half solid, when above the  earth is

called snow, and when upon the earth,  and condensed from dew,  hoarfrost.  Then, again, there are the

numerous  kinds of water which  have been mingled with one another, and are distilled  through plants  which

grow in the earth; and this whole class is called by  the name of  juices or saps.  The unequal admixture of these

fluids creates  a  variety of species; most of them are nameless, but four which are of a  fiery nature are clearly

distinguished and have names.  First, there  is  wine, which warms the soul as well as the body:  secondly, there

is  the  oily nature, which is smooth and divides the visual ray, and for  this  reason is bright and shining and of

a glistening appearance,  including  pitch, the juice of the castor berry, oil itself, and other  things of a  like kind:

thirdly, there is the class of substances  which expand the  contracted parts of the mouth, until they return to

their natural state,  and by reason of this property create  sweetness;these are included under  the general

name of honey:  and,  lastly, there is a frothy nature, which  differs from all juices,  having a burning quality

which dissolves the  flesh; it is called opos  (a vegetable acid). 


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 68



Top




Page No 71


As to the kinds of earth, that which is filtered through water  passes into  stone in the following manner:The

water which mixes with  the earth and is  broken up in the process changes into air, and taking  this form

mounts into  its own place.  But as there is no surrounding  vacuum it thrusts away the  neighbouring air, and

this being rendered  heavy, and, when it is displaced,  having been poured around the mass  of earth, forcibly

compresses it and  drives it into the vacant space  whence the new air had come up; and the  earth when

compressed by the  air into an indissoluble union with water  becomes rock.  The fairer  sort is that which is

made up of equal and  similar parts and is  transparent; that which has the opposite qualities is  inferior.  But

when all the watery part is suddenly drawn out by fire, a  more brittle  substance is formed, to which we give

the name of pottery.  Sometimes  also moisture may remain, and the earth which has been fused by  fire

becomes, when cool, a certain stone of a black colour.  A like  separation of the water which had been

copiously mingled with them may  occur in two substances composed of finer particles of earth and of a  briny

nature; out of either of them a halfsolidbody is then formed,  soluble in  waterthe one, soda, which is

used for purging away oil  and earth, the  other, salt, which harmonizes so well in combinations  pleasing to the

palate, and is, as the law testifies, a substance dear  to the gods.  The  compounds of earth and water are not

soluble by  water, but by fire only,  and for this reason:Neither fire nor air  melt masses of earth; for their

particles, being smaller than the  interstices in its structure, have plenty  of room to move without  forcing their

way, and so they leave the earth  unmelted and  undissolved; but particles of water, which are larger, force a

passage, and dissolve and melt the earth.  Wherefore earth when not  consolidated by force is dissolved by

water only; when consolidated,  by  nothing but fire; for this is the only body which can find an  entrance.  The

cohesion of water again, when very strong, is dissolved  by fire  onlywhen weaker, then either by air or

firethe former  entering the  interstices, and the latter penetrating even the  triangles.  But nothing  can

dissolve air, when strongly condensed,  which does not reach the  elements or triangles; or if not strongly

condensed, then only fire can  dissolve it.  As to bodies composed of  earth and water, while the water  occupies

the vacant interstices of  the earth in them which are compressed  by force, the particles of  water which

approach them from without, finding  no entrance, flow  around the entire mass and leave it undissolved; but

the  particles of  fire, entering into the interstices of the water, do to the  water what  water does to earth and fire

to air (The text seems to be  corrupt.),  and are the sole causes of the compound body of earth and water

liquefying and becoming fluid.  Now these bodies are of two kinds;  some of  them, such as glass and the

fusible sort of stones, have less  water than  they have earth; on the other hand, substances of the  nature of wax

and  incense have more of water entering into their  composition. 

I have thus shown the various classes of bodies as they are  diversified by  their forms and combinations and

changes into one  another, and now I must  endeavour to set forth their affections and  the causes of them.  In

the  first place, the bodies which I have been  describing are necessarily  objects of sense.  But we have not yet

considered the origin of flesh, or  what belongs to flesh, or of that  part of the soul which is mortal.  And  these

things cannot be  adequately explained without also explaining the  affections which are  concerned with

sensation, nor the latter without the  former:  and yet  to explain them together is hardly possible; for which

reason we must  assume first one or the other and afterwards examine the  nature of our  hypothesis.  In order,

then, that the affections may follow  regularly  after the elements, let us presuppose the existence of body and

soul. 

First, let us enquire what we mean by saying that fire is hot; and  about  this we may reason from the dividing

or cutting power which it  exercises on  our bodies.  We all of us feel that fire is sharp; and we  may further

consider the fineness of the sides, and the sharpness of  the angles, and  the smallness of the particles, and the

swiftness of  the motionall this  makes the action of fire violent and sharp, so  that it cuts whatever it  meets.

And we must not forget that the  original figure of fire (i.e. the  pyramid), more than any other form,  has a

dividing power which cuts our  bodies into small pieces  (Kepmatizei), and thus naturally produces that

affection which we call  heat; and hence the origin of the name (thepmos,  Kepma).  Now, the  opposite of this

is sufficiently manifest; nevertheless  we will not  fail to describe it.  For the larger particles of moisture  which

surround the body, entering in and driving out the lesser, but not  being able to take their places, compress the

moist principle in us;  and  this from being unequal and disturbed, is forced by them into a  state of  rest, which


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 69



Top




Page No 72


is due to equability and compression.  But things  which are  contracted contrary to nature are by nature at war,

and  force themselves  apart; and to this war and convulsion the name of  shivering and trembling  is given; and

the whole affection and the  cause of the affection are both  termed cold.  That is called hard to  which our flesh

yields, and soft which  yields to our flesh; and things  are also termed hard and soft relatively to  one another.

That which  yields has a small base; but that which rests on  quadrangular bases is  firmly posed and belongs to

the class which offers  the greatest  resistance; so too does that which is the most compact and  therefore  most

repellent.  The nature of the light and the heavy will be  best  understood when examined in connexion with our

notions of above and  below; for it is quite a mistake to suppose that the universe is  parted  into two regions,

separate from and opposite to each other, the  one a lower  to which all things tend which have any bulk, and

an upper  to which things  only ascend against their will.  For as the universe  is in the form of a  sphere, all the

extremities, being equidistant  from the centre, are equally  extremities, and the centre, which is  equidistant

from them, is equally to  be regarded as the opposite of  them all.  Such being the nature of the  world, when a

person says that  any of these points is above or below, may  he not be justly charged  with using an improper

expression?  For the centre  of the world cannot  be rightly called either above or below, but is the  centre and

nothing  else; and the circumference is not the centre, and has  in no one part  of itself a different relation to the

centre from what it  has in any  of the opposite parts.  Indeed, when it is in every direction  similar,  how can one

rightly give to it names which imply opposition?  For  if  there were any solid body in equipoise at the centre of

the universe,  there would be nothing to draw it to this extreme rather than to that,  for  they are all perfectly

similar; and if a person were to go round  the world  in a circle, he would often, when standing at the antipodes

of his former  position, speak of the same point as above and below;  for, as I was saying  just now, to speak of

the whole which is in the  form of a globe as having  one part above and another below is not like  a sensible

man.  The reason  why these names are used, and the  circumstances under which they are  ordinarily applied by

us to the  division of the heavens, may be elucidated  by the following  supposition:if a person were to stand

in that part of  the universe  which is the appointed place of fire, and where there is the  great  mass of fire to

which fiery bodies gatherif, I say, he were to  ascend thither, and, having the power to do this, were to

abstract  particles of fire and put them in scales and weigh them, and then,  raising  the balance, were to draw

the fire by force towards the  uncongenial element  of the air, it would be very evident that he could  compel the

smaller mass  more readily than the larger; for when two  things are simultaneously raised  by one and the same

power, the  smaller body must necessarily yield to the  superior power with less  reluctance than the larger; and

the larger body is  called heavy and  said to tend downwards, and the smaller body is called  light and said  to

tend upwards.  And we may detect ourselves who are upon  the earth  doing precisely the same thing.  For we

often separate earthy  natures,  and sometimes earth itself, and draw them into the uncongenial  element  of air

by force and contrary to nature, both clinging to their  kindred  elements.  But that which is smaller yields to

the impulse given by  us  towards the dissimilar element more easily than the larger; and so we  call the former

light, and the place towards which it is impelled we  call  above, and the contrary state and place we call heavy

and below  respectively.  Now the relations of these must necessarily vary,  because  the principal masses of the

different elements hold opposite  positions; for  that which is light, heavy, below or above in one place  will be

found to be  and become contrary and transverse and every way  diverse in relation to  that which is light,

heavy, below or above in  an opposite place.  And about  all of them this has to be  considered:that the

tendency of each towards  its kindred element  makes the body which is moved heavy, and the place  towards

which the  motion tends below, but things which have an opposite  tendency we call  by an opposite name.

Such are the causes which we assign  to these  phenomena.  As to the smooth and the rough, any one who sees

them  can  explain the reason of them to another.  For roughness is hardness  mingled with irregularity, and

smoothness is produced by the joint  effect  of uniformity and density. 

The most important of the affections which concern the whole body  remains  to be consideredthat is, the

cause of pleasure and pain in  the  perceptions of which I have been speaking, and in all other things  which  are

perceived by sense through the parts of the body, and have  both pains  and pleasures attendant on them.  Let us

imagine the causes  of every  affection, whether of sense or not, to be of the following  nature,  remembering

that we have already distinguished between the  nature which is  easy and which is hard to move; for this is the

direction in which we must  hunt the prey which we mean to take.  A  body which is of a nature to be  easily


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 70



Top




Page No 73


moved, on receiving an  impression however slight, spreads abroad the  motion in a circle, the  parts

communicating with each other, until at last,  reaching the  principle of mind, they announce the quality of the

agent.  But a body  of the opposite kind, being immobile, and not extending to the  surrounding region, merely

receives the impression, and does not stir  any  of the neighbouring parts; and since the parts do not distribute

the  original impression to other parts, it has no effect of motion on  the whole  animal, and therefore produces

no effect on the patient.  This is true of  the bones and hair and other more earthy parts of the  human body;

whereas  what was said above relates mainly to sight and  hearing, because they have  in them the greatest

amount of fire and  air.  Now we must conceive of  pleasure and pain in this way.  An  impression produced in

us contrary to  nature and violent, if sudden,  is painful; and, again, the sudden return to  nature is pleasant; but

a  gentle and gradual return is imperceptible and  vice versa.  On the  other hand the impression of sense which

is most easily  produced is  most readily felt, but is not accompanied by pleasure or pain;  such,  for example,

are the affections of the sight, which, as we said  above,  is a body naturally uniting with our body in the

daytime; for  cuttings and burnings and other affections which happen to the sight  do not  give pain, nor is

there pleasure when the sight returns to its  natural  state; but the sensations are clearest and strongest

according  to the  manner in which the eye is affected by the object, and itself  strikes and  touches it; there is no

violence either in the contraction  or dilation of  the eye.  But bodies formed of larger particles yield  to the

agent only  with a struggle; and then they impart their motions  to the whole and cause  pleasure and

painpain when alienated from  their natural conditions, and  pleasure when restored to them.  Things  which

experience gradual  withdrawings and emptyings of their nature,  and great and sudden  replenishments, fail to

perceive the emptying,  but are sensible of the  replenishment; and so they occasion no pain,  but the greatest

pleasure, to  the mortal part of the soul, as is  manifest in the case of perfumes.  But  things which are changed

all of  a sudden, and only gradually and with  difficulty return to their own  nature, have effects in every way

opposite  to the former, as is  evident in the case of burnings and cuttings of the  body. 

Thus have we discussed the general affections of the whole body,  and the  names of the agents which produce

them.  And now I will  endeavour to speak  of the affections of particular parts, and the  causes and agents of

them,  as far as I am able.  In the first place  let us set forth what was omitted  when we were speaking of juices,

concerning the affections peculiar to the  tongue.  These too, like  most of the other affections, appear to be

caused  by certain  contractions and dilations, but they have besides more of  roughness  and smoothness than is

found in other affections; for whenever  earthy  particles enter into the small veins which are the testing

instruments  of the tongue, reaching to the heart, and fall upon the moist,  delicate portions of fleshwhen, as

they are dissolved, they contract  and  dry up the little veins, they are astringent if they are rougher,  but if  not

so rough, then only harsh.  Those of them which are of an  abstergent  nature, and purge the whole surface of

the tongue, if they  do it in excess,  and so encroach as to consume some part of the flesh  itself, like potash  and

soda, are all termed bitter.  But the  particles which are deficient in  the alkaline quality, and which  cleanse only

moderately, are called salt,  and having no bitterness or  roughness, are regarded as rather agreeable  than

otherwise.  Bodies  which share in and are made smooth by the heat of  the mouth, and which  are inflamed, and

again in turn inflame that which  heats them, and  which are so light that they are carried upwards to the

sensations of  the head, and cut all that comes in their way, by reason of  these  qualities in them, are all termed

pungent.  But when these same  particles, refined by putrefaction, enter into the narrow veins, and  are  duly

proportioned to the particles of earth and air which are  there, they  set them whirling about one another, and

while they are in  a whirl cause  them to dash against and enter into one another, and so  form hollows

surrounding the particles that enterwhich watery  vessels of air (for a  film of moisture, sometimes earthy,

sometimes  pure, is spread around the  air) are hollow spheres of water; and those  of them which are pure, are

transparent, and are called bubbles, while  those composed of the earthy  liquid, which is in a state of general

agitation and effervescence, are  said to boil or fermentof all these  affections the cause is termed acid.  And

there is the opposite  affection arising from an opposite cause, when  the mass of entering  particles, immersed

in the moisture of the mouth, is  congenial to the  tongue, and smooths and oils over the roughness, and  relaxes

the parts  which are unnaturally contracted, and contracts the parts  which are  relaxed, and disposes them all

according to their nature;that  sort  of remedy of violent affections is pleasant and agreeable to every  man,

and has the name sweet.  But enough of this. 


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 71



Top




Page No 74


The faculty of smell does not admit of differences of kind; for all  smells  are of a halfformed nature, and no

element is so proportioned  as to have  any smell.  The veins about the nose are too narrow to  admit earth and

water, and too wide to detain fire and air; and for  this reason no one ever  perceives the smell of any of them;

but smells  always proceed from bodies  that are damp, or putrefying, or  liquefying, or evaporating, and are

perceptible only in the  intermediate state, when water is changing into air  and air into  water; and all of them

are either vapour or mist.  That which  is  passing out of air into water is mist, and that which is passing from

water into air is vapour; and hence all smells are thinner than water  and  thicker than air.  The proof of this is,

that when there is any  obstruction  to the respiration, and a man draws in his breath by  force, then no smell

filters through, but the air without the smell  alone penetrates.  Wherefore  the varieties of smell have no name,

and  they have not many, or definite  and simple kinds; but they are  distinguished only as painful and pleasant,

the one sort irritating  and disturbing the whole cavity which is situated  between the head and  the navel, the

other having a soothing influence, and  restoring this  same region to an agreeable and natural condition. 

In considering the third kind of sense, hearing, we must speak of  the  causes in which it originates.  We may in

general assume sound to  be a blow  which passes through the ears, and is transmitted by means  of the air, the

brain, and the blood, to the soul, and that hearing is  the vibration of  this blow, which begins in the head and

ends in the  region of the liver.  The sound which moves swiftly is acute, and the  sound which moves slowly is

grave, and that which is regular is  equable and smooth, and the reverse is  harsh.  A great body of sound  is

loud, and a small body of sound the  reverse.  Respecting the  harmonies of sound I must hereafter speak. 

There is a fourth class of sensible things, having many intricate  varieties, which must now be distinguished.

They are called by the  general  name of colours, and are a flame which emanates from every  sort of body,  and

has particles corresponding to the sense of sight.  I have spoken  already, in what has preceded, of the causes

which  generate sight, and in  this place it will be natural and suitable to  give a rational theory of  colours. 

Of the particles coming from other bodies which fall upon the  sight, some  are smaller and some are larger,

and some are equal to the  parts of the  sight itself.  Those which are equal are imperceptible,  and we call them

transparent.  The larger produce contraction, the  smaller dilation, in the  sight, exercising a power akin to that

of hot  and cold bodies on the flesh,  or of astringent bodies on the tongue,  or of those heating bodies which we

termed pungent.  White and black  are similar effects of contraction and  dilation in another sphere, and  for this

reason have a different  appearance.  Wherefore, we ought to  term white that which dilates the  visual ray, and

the opposite of this  is black.  There is also a swifter  motion of a different sort of fire  which strikes and dilates

the ray of  sight until it reaches the eyes,  forcing a way through their passages and  melting them, and eliciting

from them a union of fire and water which we  call tears, being itself  an opposite fire which comes to them

from an  opposite directionthe  inner fire flashes forth like lightning, and the  outer finds a way in  and is

extinguished in the moisture, and all sorts of  colours are  generated by the mixture.  This affection is termed

dazzling,  and the  object which produces it is called bright and flashing.  There is  another sort of fire which is

intermediate, and which reaches and  mingles  with the moisture of the eye without flashing; and in this,  the

fire  mingling with the ray of the moisture, produces a colour like  blood, to  which we give the name of red.  A

bright hue mingled with  red and white  gives the colour called auburn (Greek).  The law of  proportion,

however,  according to which the several colours are  formed, even if a man knew he  would be foolish in

telling, for he  could not give any necessary reason,  nor indeed any tolerable or  probable explanation of them.

Again, red, when  mingled with black and  white, becomes purple, but it becomes umber (Greek)  when the

colours  are burnt as well as mingled and the black is more  thoroughly mixed  with them.  Flamecolour

(Greek) is produced by a union of  auburn and  dun (Greek), and dun by an admixture of black and white; pale

yellow  (Greek), by an admixture of white and auburn.  White and bright  meeting, and falling upon a full

black, become dark blue (Greek), and  when  dark blue mingles with white, a light blue (Greek) colour is

formed, as  flamecolour with black makes leek green (Greek).  There  will be no  difficulty in seeing how and

by what mixtures the colours  derived from  these are made according to the rules of probability.  He, however,

who  should attempt to verify all this by experiment,  would forget the  difference of the human and divine

nature.  For God  only has the knowledge  and also the power which are able to combine  many things into one


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 72



Top




Page No 75


and again  resolve the one into many.  But no man  either is or ever will be able to  accomplish either the one or

the  other operation. 

These are the elements, thus of necessity then subsisting, which  the  creator of the fairest and best of created

things associated with  himself,  when he made the selfsufficing and most perfect God, using  the necessary

causes as his ministers in the accomplishment of his  work, but himself  contriving the good in all his

creations.  Wherefore  we may distinguish two  sorts of causes, the one divine and the other  necessary, and may

seek for  the divine in all things, as far as our  nature admits, with a view to the  blessed life; but the necessary

kind  only for the sake of the divine,  considering that without them and  when isolated from them, these higher

things for which we look cannot  be apprehended or received or in any way  shared by us. 

Seeing, then, that we have now prepared for our use the various  classes of  causes which are the material out

of which the remainder of  our discourse  must be woven, just as wood is the material of the  carpenter, let us

revert  in a few words to the point at which we  began, and then endeavour to add on  a suitable ending to the

beginning  of our tale. 

As I said at first, when all things were in disorder God created in  each  thing in relation to itself, and in all

things in relation to  each other,  all the measures and harmonies which they could possibly  receive.  For in

those days nothing had any proportion except by  accident; nor did any of  the things which now have names

deserve to be  named at allas, for  example, fire, water, and the rest of the  elements.  All these the creator

first set in order, and out of them  he constructed the universe, which was  a single animal comprehending  in

itself all other animals, mortal and  immortal.  Now of the divine,  he himself was the creator, but the creation

of the mortal he  committed to his offspring.  And they, imitating him,  received from  him the immortal

principle of the soul; and around this they  proceeded  to fashion a mortal body, and made it to be the vehicle

of the  soul,  and constructed within the body a soul of another nature which was  mortal, subject to terrible and

irresistible affections,first of  all,  pleasure, the greatest incitement to evil; then, pain, which  deters from

good; also rashness and fear, two foolish counsellors,  anger hard to be  appeased, and hope easily led

astray;these they  mingled with irrational  sense and with alldaring love according to  necessary laws, and

so framed  man.  Wherefore, fearing to pollute the  divine any more than was absolutely  unavoidable, they gave

to the  mortal nature a separate habitation in  another part of the body,  placing the neck between them to be the

isthmus  and boundary, which  they constructed between the head and breast, to keep  them apart.  And  in the

breast, and in what is termed the thorax, they  encased the  mortal soul; and as the one part of this was superior

and the  other  inferior they divided the cavity of the thorax into two parts, as the  women's and men's

apartments are divided in houses, and placed the  midriff  to be a wall of partition between them.  That part of

the  inferior soul  which is endowed with courage and passion and loves  contention they settled  nearer the

head, midway between the midriff  and the neck, in order that it  might be under the rule of reason and  might

join with it in controlling and  restraining the desires when  they are no longer willing of their own accord  to

obey the word of  command issuing from the citadel. 

The heart, the knot of the veins and the fountain of the blood  which races  through all the limbs, was set in the

place of guard, that  when the might  of passion was roused by reason making proclamation of  any wrong

assailing  them from without or being perpetrated by the  desires within, quickly the  whole power of feeling in

the body,  perceiving these commands and threats,  might obey and follow through  every turn and alley, and

thus allow the  principle of the best to have  the command in all of them.  But the gods,  foreknowing that the

palpitation of the heart in the expectation of danger  and the swelling  and excitement of passion was caused by

fire, formed and  implanted as  a supporter to the heart the lung, which was, in the first  place, soft  and

bloodless, and also had within hollows like the pores of a  sponge,  in order that by receiving the breath and the

drink, it might give  coolness and the power of respiration and alleviate the heat.  Wherefore  they cut the

airchannels leading to the lung, and placed  the lung about  the heart as a soft spring, that, when passion was

rife  within, the heart,  beating against a yielding body, might be cooled  and suffer less, and might  thus become

more ready to join with passion  in the service of reason. 


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 73



Top




Page No 76


The part of the soul which desires meats and drinks and the other  things of  which it has need by reason of the

bodily nature, they  placed between the  midriff and the boundary of the navel, contriving  in all this region a

sort  of manger for the food of the body; and  there they bound it down like a  wild animal which was chained

up with  man, and must be nourished if man was  to exist.  They appointed this  lower creation his place here in

order that  he might be always feeding  at the manger, and have his dwelling as far as  might be from the

councilchamber, making as little noise and disturbance  as possible,  and permitting the best part to advise

quietly for the good of  the  whole.  And knowing that this lower principle in man would not  comprehend

reason, and even if attaining to some degree of perception  would  never naturally care for rational notions, but

that it would be  led away by  phantoms and visions night and day,to be a remedy for  this, God combined

with it the liver, and placed it in the house of  the lower nature,  contriving that it should be solid and smooth,

and  bright and sweet, and  should also have a bitter quality, in order that  the power of thought,  which proceeds

from the mind, might be reflected  as in a mirror which  receives likenesses of objects and gives back  images

of them to the sight;  and so might strike terror into the  desires, when, making use of the bitter  part of the

liver, to which it  is akin, it comes threatening and invading,  and diffusing this bitter  element swiftly through

the whole liver produces  colours like bile,  and contracting every part makes it wrinkled and rough;  and

twisting  out of its right place and contorting the lobe and closing and  shutting up the vessels and gates, causes

pain and loathing.  And the  converse happens when some gentle inspiration of the understanding  pictures

images of an opposite character, and allays the bile and  bitterness by  refusing to stir or touch the nature

opposed to itself,  but by making use  of the natural sweetness of the liver, corrects all  things and makes them

to be right and smooth and free, and renders the  portion of the soul which  resides about the liver happy and

joyful,  enabling it to pass the night in  peace, and to practise divination in  sleep, inasmuch as it has no share in

mind and reason.  For the  authors of our being, remembering the command of  their father when he  bade them

create the human race as good as they could,  that they might  correct our inferior parts and make them to

attain a  measure of truth,  placed in the liver the seat of divination.  And herein  is a proof  that God has given

the art of divination not to the wisdom, but  to the  foolishness of man.  No man, when in his wits, attains

prophetic  truth  and inspiration; but when he receives the inspired word, either his  intelligence is enthralled in

sleep, or he is demented by some  distemper or  possession.  And he who would understand what he  remembers

to have been  said, whether in a dream or when he was awake,  by the prophetic and  inspired nature, or would

determine by reason the  meaning of the  apparitions which he has seen, and what indications  they afford to

this man  or that, of past, present or future good and  evil, must first recover his  wits.  But, while he continues

demented,  he cannot judge of the visions  which he sees or the words which he  utters; the ancient saying is

very  true, that 'only a man who has his  wits can act or judge about himself and  his own affairs.'  And for  this

reason it is customary to appoint  interpreters to be judges of  the true inspiration.  Some persons call them

prophets; they are quite  unaware that they are only the expositors of dark  sayings and visions,  and are not to

be called prophets at all, but only  interpreters of  prophecy. 

Such is the nature of the liver, which is placed as we have  described in  order that it may give prophetic

intimations.  During the  life of each  individual these intimations are plainer, but after his  death the liver

becomes blind, and delivers oracles too obscure to be  intelligible.  The  neighbouring organ (the spleen) is

situated on the  lefthand side, and is  constructed with a view of keeping the liver  bright and pure,like a

napkin, always ready prepared and at hand to  clean the mirror.  And hence,  when any impurities arise in the

region  of the liver by reason of disorders  of the body, the loose nature of  the spleen, which is composed of a

hollow  and bloodless tissue,  receives them all and clears them away, and when  filled with the  unclean matter,

swells and festers, but, again, when the  body is  purged, settles down into the same place as before, and is

humbled. 

Concerning the soul, as to which part is mortal and which divine,  and how  and why they are separated, and

where located, if God  acknowledges that we  have spoken the truth, then, and then only, can  we be confident;

still, we  may venture to assert that what has been  said by us is probable, and will  be rendered more probable

by  investigation.  Let us assume thus much. 


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 74



Top




Page No 77


The creation of the rest of the body follows next in order, and  this we may  investigate in a similar manner.

And it appears to be  very meet that the  body should be framed on the following  principles: 

The authors of our race were aware that we should be intemperate in  eating  and drinking, and take a good

deal more than was necessary or  proper, by  reason of gluttony.  In order then that disease might not  quickly

destroy  us, and lest our mortal race should perish without  fulfilling its end  intending to provide against

this, the gods made  what is called the lower  belly, to be a receptacle for the superfluous  meat and drink, and

formed  the convolution of the bowels, so that the  food might be prevented from  passing quickly through and

compelling  the body to require more food, thus  producing insatiable gluttony, and  making the whole race an

enemy to  philosophy and music, and rebellious  against the divinest element within  us. 

The bones and flesh, and other similar parts of us, were made as  follows.  The first principle of all of them

was the generation of the  marrow.  For  the bonds of life which unite the soul with the body are  made fast

there,  and they are the root and foundation of the human  race.  The marrow itself  is created out of other

materials:  God took  such of the primary triangles  as were straight and smooth, and were  adapted by their

perfection to  produce fire and water, and air and  earththese, I say, he separated from  their kinds, and

mingling them  in due proportions with one another, made  the marrow out of them to be  a universal seed of

the whole race of mankind;  and in this seed he  then planted and enclosed the souls, and in the  original

distribution  gave to the marrow as many and various forms as the  different kinds of  souls were hereafter to

receive.  That which, like a  field, was to  receive the divine seed, he made round every way, and called  that

portion of the marrow, brain, intending that, when an animal was  perfected, the vessel containing this

substance should be the head;  but  that which was intended to contain the remaining and mortal part  of the

soul he distributed into figures at once round and elongated,  and he called  them all by the name 'marrow'; and

to these, as to  anchors, fastening the  bonds of the whole soul, he proceeded to  fashion around them the entire

framework of our body, constructing for  the marrow, first of all a complete  covering of bone. 

Bone was composed by him in the following manner.  Having sifted  pure and  smooth earth he kneaded it and

wetted it with marrow, and  after that he put  it into fire and then into water, and once more into  fire and again

into  waterin this way by frequent transfers from one  to the other he made it  insoluble by either.  Out of this

he  fashioned, as in a lathe, a globe made  of bone, which he placed around  the brain, and in this he left a

narrow  opening; and around the marrow  of the neck and back he formed vertebrae  which he placed under one

another like pivots, beginning at the head and  extending through the  whole of the trunk.  Thus wishing to

preserve the  entire seed, he  enclosed it in a stonelike casing, inserting joints, and  using in the  formation of

them the power of the other or diverse as an  intermediate  nature, that they might have motion and flexure.

Then again,  considering that the bone would be too brittle and inflexible, and  when  heated and again cooled

would soon mortify and destroy the seed  within  having this in view, he contrived the sinews and the flesh,

that so binding  all the members together by the sinews, which admitted  of being stretched  and relaxed about

the vertebrae, he might thus make  the body capable of  flexion and extension, while the flesh would serve  as a

protection against  the summer heat and against the winter cold,  and also against falls, softly  and easily

yielding to external bodies,  like articles made of felt; and  containing in itself a warm moisture  which in

summer exudes and makes the  surface damp, would impart a  natural coolness to the whole body; and again  in

winter by the help of  this internal warmth would form a very tolerable  defence against the  frost which

surrounds it and attacks it from without.  He who modelled  us, considering these things, mixed earth with fire

and  water and  blended them; and making a ferment of acid and salt, he mingled  it  with them and formed soft

and succulent flesh.  As for the sinews, he  made them of a mixture of bone and unfermented flesh, attempered

so as  to  be in a mean, and gave them a yellow colour; wherefore the sinews  have a  firmer and more glutinous

nature than flesh, but a softer and  moister  nature than the bones.  With these God covered the bones and

marrow,  binding them together by sinews, and then enshrouded them all  in an upper  covering of flesh.  The

more living and sensitive of the  bones he enclosed  in the thinnest film of flesh, and those which had  the least

life within  them in the thickest and most solid flesh.  So  again on the joints of the  bones, where reason

indicated that no more  was required, he placed only a  thin covering of flesh, that it might  not interfere with


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 75



Top




Page No 78


the flexion of our  bodies and make them unwieldy  because difficult to move; and also that it  might not, by

being  crowded and pressed and matted together, destroy  sensation by reason  of its hardness, and impair the

memory and dull the  edge of  intelligence.  Wherefore also the thighs and the shanks and the  hips,  and the

bones of the arms and the forearms, and other parts which  have  no joints, and the inner bones, which on

account of the rarity of the  soul in the marrow are destitute of reasonall these are abundantly  provided with

flesh; but such as have mind in them are in general less  fleshy, except where the creator has made some part

solely of flesh in  order to give sensation,as, for example, the tongue.  But commonly  this  is not the case.

For the nature which comes into being and grows  up in us  by a law of necessity, does not admit of the

combination of  solid bone and  much flesh with acute perceptions.  More than any other  part the framework  of

the head would have had them, if they could have  coexisted, and the  human race, having a strong and fleshy

and sinewy  head, would have had a  life twice or many times as long as it now has,  and also more healthy and

free from pain.  But our creators,  considering whether they should make a  longerlived race which was  worse,

or a shorterlived race which was  better, came to the  conclusion that every one ought to prefer a shorter  span

of life,  which was better, to a longer one, which was worse; and  therefore they  covered the head with thin

bone, but not with flesh and  sinews, since  it had no joints; and thus the head was added, having more  wisdom

and  sensation than the rest of the body, but also being in every man  far  weaker.  For these reasons and after

this manner God placed the sinews  at the extremity of the head, in a circle round the neck, and glued  them

together by the principle of likeness and fastened the  extremities of the  jawbones to them below the face, and

the other  sinews he dispersed  throughout the body, fastening limb to limb.  The  framers of us framed the

mouth, as now arranged, having teeth and  tongue and lips, with a view to  the necessary and the good

contriving  the way in for necessary purposes,  the way out for the best purposes;  for that is necessary which

enters in  and gives food to the body; but  the river of speech, which flows out of a  man and ministers to the

intelligence, is the fairest and noblest of all  streams.  Still the  head could neither be left a bare frame of bones,

on  account of the  extremes of heat and cold in the different seasons, nor yet  be allowed  to be wholly covered,

and so become dull and senseless by reason  of an  overgrowth of flesh.  The fleshy nature was not therefore

wholly  dried  up, but a large sort of peel was parted off and remained over, which  is now called the skin.  This

met and grew by the help of the cerebral  moisture, and became the circular envelopment of the head.  And the

moisture, rising up under the sutures, watered and closed in the skin  upon  the crown, forming a sort of knot.

The diversity of the sutures  was caused  by the power of the courses of the soul and of the food,  and the more

these  struggled against one another the more numerous  they became, and fewer if  the struggle were less

violent.  This skin  the divine power pierced all  round with fire, and out of the punctures  which were thus made

the moisture  issued forth, and the liquid and  heat which was pure came away, and a mixed  part which was

composed of  the same material as the skin, and had a  fineness equal to the  punctures, was borne up by its

own impulse and  extended far outside  the head, but being too slow to escape, was thrust  back by the  external

air, and rolled up underneath the skin, where it took  root.  Thus the hair sprang up in the skin, being akin to it

because it is  like threads of leather, but rendered harder and closer through the  pressure of the cold, by which

each hair, while in process of  separation  from the skin, is compressed and cooled.  Wherefore the  creator

formed the  head hairy, making use of the causes which I have  mentioned, and reflecting  also that instead of

flesh the brain needed  the hair to be a light covering  or guard, which would give shade in  summer and shelter

in winter, and at  the same time would not impede  our quickness of perception.  From the  combination of

sinew, skin, and  bone, in the structure of the finger, there  arises a triple compound,  which, when dried up,

takes the form of one hard  skin partaking of all  three natures, and was fabricated by these second  causes, but

designed  by mind which is the principal cause with an eye to  the future.  For  our creators well knew that

women and other animals would  some day be  framed out of men, and they further knew that many animals

would  require the use of nails for many purposes; wherefore they fashioned  in men at their first creation the

rudiments of nails.  For this  purpose  and for these reasons they caused skin, hair, and nails to  grow at the

extremities of the limbs. 

And now that all the parts and members of the mortal animal had  come  together, since its life of necessity

consisted of fire and  breath, and it  therefore wasted away by dissolution and depletion, the  gods contrived the

following remedy:  They mingled a nature akin to  that of man with other  forms and perceptions, and thus


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 76



Top




Page No 79


created another  kind of animal.  These are  the trees and plants and seeds which have  been improved by

cultivation and  are now domesticated among us;  anciently there were only the wild kinds,  which are older

than the  cultivated.  For everything that partakes of life  may be truly called  a living being, and the animal of

which we are now  speaking partakes  of the third kind of soul, which is said to be seated  between the  midriff

and the navel, having no part in opinion or reason or  mind,  but only in feelings of pleasure and pain and the

desires which  accompany them.  For this nature is always in a passive state,  revolving in  and about itself,

repelling the motion from without and  using its own, and  accordingly is not endowed by nature with the

power  of observing or  reflecting on its own concerns.  Wherefore it lives  and does not differ  from a living

being, but is fixed and rooted in  the same spot, having no  power of selfmotion. 

Now after the superior powers had created all these natures to be  food for  us who are of the inferior nature,

they cut various channels  through the  body as through a garden, that it might be watered as from  a running

stream.  In the first place, they cut two hidden channels or  veins down the  back where the skin and the flesh

join, which answered  severally to the  right and left side of the body.  These they let down  along the backbone,

so as to have the marrow of generation between  them, where it was most  likely to flourish, and in order that

the  stream coming down from above  might flow freely to the other parts,  and equalize the irrigation.  In the

next place, they divided the  veins about the head, and interlacing them,  they sent them in opposite  directions;

those coming from the right side  they sent to the left of  the body, and those from the left they diverted

towards the right, so  that they and the skin might together form a bond  which should fasten  the head to the

body, since the crown of the head was  not encircled by  sinews; and also in order that the sensations from both

sides might be  distributed over the whole body.  And next, they ordered the  watercourses of the body in a

manner which I will describe, and which  will  be more easily understood if we begin by admitting that all

things which  have lesser parts retain the greater, but the greater  cannot retain the  lesser.  Now of all natures

fire has the smallest  parts, and therefore  penetrates through earth and water and air and  their compounds, nor

can  anything hold it.  And a similar principle  applies to the human belly; for  when meats and drinks enter it, it

holds them, but it cannot hold air and  fire, because the particles of  which they consist are smaller than its own

structure. 

These elements, therefore, God employed for the sake of  distributing  moisture from the belly into the veins,

weaving together  a network of fire  and air like a weel, having at the entrance two  lesser weels; further he

constructed one of these with two openings,  and from the lesser weels he  extended cords reaching all round to

the  extremities of the network.  All  the interior of the net he made of  fire, but the lesser weels and their  cavity,

of air.  The network he  took and spread over the newlyformed  animal in the following  manner:He let the

lesser weels pass into the  mouth; there were two  of them, and one he let down by the airpipes into  the lungs,

the  other by the side of the airpipes into the belly.  The  former he  divided into two branches, both of which

he made to meet at the  channels of the nose, so that when the way through the mouth did not  act,  the streams

of the mouth as well were replenished through the  nose.  With  the other cavity (i.e. of the greater weel) he

enveloped  the hollow parts  of the body, and at one time he made all this to flow  into the lesser  weels, quite

gently, for they are composed of air, and  at another time he  caused the lesser weels to flow back again; and

the  net he made to find a  way in and out through the pores of the body,  and the rays of fire which  are bound

fast within followed the passage  of the air either way, never at  any time ceasing so long as the mortal  being

holds together.  This process,  as we affirm, the namegiver  named inspiration and expiration.  And all  this

movement, active as  well as passive, takes place in order that the  body, being watered and  cooled, may

receive nourishment and life; for when  the respiration is  going in and out, and the fire, which is fast bound

within, follows  it, and ever and anon moving to and fro, enters through the  belly and  reaches the meat and

drink, it dissolves them, and dividing them  into  small portions and guiding them through the passages where

it goes,  pumps them as from a fountain into the channels of the veins, and  makes the  stream of the veins flow

through the body as through a  conduit. 

Let us once more consider the phenomena of respiration, and enquire  into  the causes which have made it

what it is.  They are as  follows:Seeing  that there is no such thing as a vacuum into which  any of those


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 77



Top




Page No 80


things  which are moved can enter, and the breath is  carried from us into the  external air, the next point is, as

will be  clear to every one, that it  does not go into a vacant space, but  pushes its neighbour out of its place,  and

that which is thrust out in  turn drives out its neighbour; and in this  way everything of necessity  at last comes

round to that place from whence  the breath came forth,  and enters in there, and following the breath, fills  up

the vacant  space; and this goes on like the rotation of a wheel, because  there  can be no such thing as a

vacuum.  Wherefore also the breast and the  lungs, when they emit the breath, are replenished by the air which

surrounds the body and which enters in through the pores of the flesh  and  is driven round in a circle; and

again, the air which is sent away  and  passes out through the body forces the breath inwards through the

passage  of the mouth and the nostrils.  Now the origin of this  movement may be  supposed to be as follows.  In

the interior of every  animal the hottest  part is that which is around the blood and veins;  it is in a manner an

internal fountain of fire, which we compare to  the network of a creel,  being woven all of fire and extended

through  the centre of the body, while  the outer parts are composed of air.  Now we must admit that heat

naturally  proceeds outward to its own  place and to its kindred element; and as there  are two exits for the  heat,

the one out through the body, and the other  through the mouth  and nostrils, when it moves towards the one, it

drives  round the air  at the other, and that which is driven round falls into the  fire and  becomes warm, and that

which goes forth is cooled.  But when the  heat  changes its place, and the particles at the other exit grow

warmer,  the hotter air inclining in that direction and carried towards its  native  element, fire, pushes round the

air at the other; and this  being affected  in the same way and communicating the same impulse, a  circular

motion  swaying to and fro is produced by the double process,  which we call  inspiration and expiration. 

The phenomena of medical cuppingglasses and of the swallowing of  drink and  of the projection of bodies,

whether discharged in the air  or bowled along  the ground, are to be investigated on a similar  principle; and

swift and  slow sounds, which appear to be high and low,  and are sometimes discordant  on account of their

inequality, and then  again harmonical on account of the  equality of the motion which they  excite in us.  For

when the motions of  the antecedent swifter sounds  begin to pause and the two are equalized, the  slower

sounds overtake  the swifter and then propel them.  When they  overtake them they do not  intrude a new and

discordant motion, but  introduce the beginnings of a  slower, which answers to the swifter as it  dies away,

thus producing a  single mixed expression out of high and low,  whence arises a pleasure  which even the

unwise feel, and which to the wise  becomes a higher  sort of delight, being an imitation of divine harmony in

mortal  motions.  Moreover, as to the flowing of water, the fall of the  thunderbolt, and the marvels that are

observed about the attraction of  amber and the Heraclean stones,in none of these cases is there any

attraction; but he who investigates rightly, will find that such  wonderful  phenomena are attributable to the

combination of certain  conditionsthe  nonexistence of a vacuum, the fact that objects push  one another

round,  and that they change places, passing severally into  their proper positions  as they are divided or

combined. 

Such as we have seen, is the nature and such are the causes of  respiration,  the subject in which this

discussion originated.  For  the fire cuts the  food and following the breath surges up within, fire  and breath

rising  together and filling the veins by drawing up out of  the belly and pouring  into them the cut portions of

the food; and so  the streams of food are kept  flowing through the whole body in all  animals.  And fresh

cuttings from  kindred substances, whether the  fruits of the earth or herb of the field,  which God planted to be

our  daily food, acquire all sorts of colours by  their intermixture; but  red is the most pervading of them,

being created  by the cutting action  of fire and by the impression which it makes on a  moist substance; and

hence the liquid which circulates in the body has a  colour such as we  have described.  The liquid itself we call

blood, which  nourishes the  flesh and the whole body, whence all parts are watered and  empty  places filled. 

Now the process of repletion and evacuation is effected after the  manner of  the universal motion by which all

kindred substances are  drawn towards one  another.  For the external elements which surround  us are always

causing us  to consume away, and distributing and sending  off like to like; the  particles of blood, too, which

are divided and  contained within the frame  of the animal as in a sort of heaven, are  compelled to imitate the

motion  of the universe.  Each, therefore, of  the divided parts within us, being  carried to its kindred nature,


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 78



Top




Page No 81


replenishes the void.  When more is taken  away than flows in, then we  decay, and when less, we grow and

increase. 

The frame of the entire creature when young has the triangles of  each kind  new, and may be compared to the

keel of a vessel which is  just off the  stocks; they are locked firmly together and yet the whole  mass is soft and

delicate, being freshly formed of marrow and nurtured  on milk.  Now when  the triangles out of which meats

and drinks are  composed come in from  without, and are comprehended in the body, being  older and weaker

than the  triangles already there, the frame of the  body gets the better of them and  its newer triangles cut them

up, and  so the animal grows great, being  nourished by a multitude of similar  particles.  But when the roots of

the  triangles are loosened by having  undergone many conflicts with many things  in the course of time, they

are no longer able to cut or assimilate the  food which enters, but are  themselves easily divided by the bodies

which  come in from without.  In this way every animal is overcome and decays, and  this affection  is called

old age.  And at last, when the bonds by which the  triangles  of the marrow are united no longer hold, and are

parted by the  strain  of existence, they in turn loosen the bonds of the soul, and she,  obtaining a natural

release, flies away with joy.  For that which  takes  place according to nature is pleasant, but that which is

contrary to nature  is painful.  And thus death, if caused by disease  or produced by wounds, is  painful and

violent; but that sort of death  which comes with old age and  fulfils the debt of nature is the easiest  of deaths,

and is accompanied  with pleasure rather than with pain. 

Now every one can see whence diseases arise.  There are four  natures out of  which the body is compacted,

earth and fire and water  and air, and the  unnatural excess or defect of these, or the change of  any of them

from its  own natural place into another, orsince there  are more kinds than one of  fire and of the other

elementsthe  assumption by any of these of a wrong  kind, or any similar  irregularity, produces disorders

and diseases; for  when any of them is  produced or changed in a manner contrary to nature, the  parts which

were previously cool grow warm, and those which were dry become  moist,  and the light become heavy, and

the heavy light; all sorts of  changes  occur.  For, as we affirm, a thing can only remain the same with  itself,

whole and sound, when the same is added to it, or subtracted  from  it, in the same respect and in the same

manner and in due  proportion; and  whatever comes or goes away in violation of these laws  causes all manner

of  changes and infinite diseases and corruptions.  Now there is a second class  of structures which are also

natural, and  this affords a second opportunity  of observing diseases to him who  would understand them.  For

whereas marrow  and bone and flesh and  sinews are composed of the four elements, and the  blood, though

after  another manner, is likewise formed out of them, most  diseases  originate in the way which I have

described; but the worst of all  owe  their severity to the fact that the generation of these substances  proceeds in

a wrong order; they are then destroyed.  For the natural  order  is that the flesh and sinews should be made of

blood, the sinews  out of the  fibres to which they are akin, and the flesh out of the  clots which are  formed

when the fibres are separated.  And the  glutinous and rich matter  which comes away from the sinews and the

flesh, not only glues the flesh to  the bones, but nourishes and  imparts growth to the bone which surrounds the

marrow; and by reason  of the solidity of the bones, that which filters  through consists of  the purest and

smoothest and oiliest sort of triangles,  dropping like  dew from the bones and watering the marrow.  Now

when each  process  takes place in this order, health commonly results; when in the  opposite order, disease.

For when the flesh becomes decomposed and  sends  back the wasting substance into the veins, then an

oversupply  of blood of  diverse kinds, mingling with air in the veins, having  variegated colours  and bitter

properties, as well as acid and saline  qualities, contains all  sorts of bile and serum and phlegm.  For all  things

go the wrong way, and  having become corrupted, first they taint  the blood itself, and then  ceasing to give

nourishment to the body  they are carried along the veins in  all directions, no longer  preserving the order of

their natural courses,  but at war with  themselves, because they receive no good from one another,  and are

hostile to the abiding constitution of the body, which they corrupt  and dissolve.  The oldest part of the flesh

which is corrupted, being  hard  to decompose, from long burning grows black, and from being  everywhere

corroded becomes bitter, and is injurious to every part of  the body which  is still uncorrupted.  Sometimes,

when the bitter  element is refined away,  the black part assumes an acidity which takes  the place of the

bitterness;  at other times the bitterness being  tinged with blood has a redder colour;  and this, when mixed


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 79



Top




Page No 82


with  black, takes the hue of grass; and again, an  auburn colour mingles  with the bitter matter when new flesh

is decomposed  by the fire which  surrounds the internal flame;to all which symptoms some  physician

perhaps, or rather some philosopher, who had the power of seeing  in  many dissimilar things one nature

deserving of a name, has assigned the  common name of bile.  But the other kinds of bile are variously

distinguished by their colours.  As for serum, that sort which is the  watery part of blood is innocent, but that

which is a secretion of  black  and acid bile is malignant when mingled by the power of heat  with any salt

substance, and is then called acid phlegm.  Again, the  substance which is  formed by the liquefaction of new

and tender flesh  when air is present, if  inflated and encased in liquid so as to form  bubbles, which separately

are  invisible owing to their small size, but  when collected are of a bulk which  is visible, and have a white

colour  arising out of the generation of  foamall this decomposition of  tender flesh when intermingled with

air is  termed by us white phlegm.  And the whey or sediment of newlyformed phlegm  is sweat and tears,  and

includes the various daily discharges by which the  body is  purified.  Now all these become causes of disease

when the blood is  not replenished in a natural manner by food and drink but gains bulk  from  opposite sources

in violation of the laws of nature.  When the  several  parts of the flesh are separated by disease, if the

foundation  remains, the  power of the disorder is only half as great, and there is  still a prospect  of an easy

recovery; but when that which binds the  flesh to the bones is  diseased, and no longer being separated from

the  muscles and sinews, ceases  to give nourishment to the bone and to  unite flesh and bone, and from being

oily and smooth and glutinous  becomes rough and salt and dry, owing to bad  regimen, then all the  substance

thus corrupted crumbles away under the  flesh and the sinews,  and separates from the bone, and the fleshy

parts  fall away from their  foundation and leave the sinews bare and full of  brine, and the flesh  again gets into

the circulation of the blood and makes  the  previouslymentioned disorders still greater.  And if these bodily

affections be severe, still worse are the prior disorders; as when the  bone  itself, by reason of the density of the

flesh, does not obtain  sufficient  air, but becomes mouldy and hot and gangrened and receives  no nutriment,

and the natural process is inverted, and the bone  crumbling passes into the  food, and the food into the flesh,

and the  flesh again falling into the  blood makes all maladies that may occur  more virulent than those already

mentioned.  But the worst case of all  is when the marrow is diseased,  either from excess or defect; and this  is

the cause of the very greatest  and most fatal disorders, in which  the whole course of the body is  reversed. 

There is a third class of diseases which may be conceived of as  arising in  three ways; for they are produced

sometimes by wind, and  sometimes by  phlegm, and sometimes by bile.  When the lung, which is  the dispenser

of  the air to the body, is obstructed by rheums and its  passages are not free,  some of them not acting, while

through others  too much air enters, then the  parts which are unrefreshed by air  corrode, while in other parts

the excess  of air forcing its way  through the veins distorts them and decomposing the  body is enclosed  in the

midst of it and occupies the midriff; thus  numberless painful  diseases are produced, accompanied by copious

sweats.  And oftentimes  when the flesh is dissolved in the body, wind, generated  within and  unable to escape,

is the source of quite as much pain as the air  coming in from without; but the greatest pain is felt when the

wind  gets  about the sinews and the veins of the shoulders, and swells them  up, and so  twists back the great

tendons and the sinews which are  connected with them.  These disorders are called tetanus and  opisthotonus,

by reason of the  tension which accompanies them.  The  cure of them is difficult; relief is  in most cases given

by fever  supervening.  The white phlegm, though  dangerous when detained within  by reason of the

airbubbles, yet if it can  communicate with the  outside air, is less severe, and only discolours the  body,

generating  leprous eruptions and similar diseases.  When it is  mingled with black  bile and dispersed about the

courses of the head, which  are the  divinest part of us, the attack if coming on in sleep, is not so  severe; but

when assailing those who are awake it is hard to be got  rid of,  and being an affection of a sacred part, is most

justly called  sacred.  An  acid and salt phlegm, again, is the source of all those  diseases which take  the form of

catarrh, but they have many names  because the places into which  they flow are manifold. 

Inflammations of the body come from burnings and inflamings, and  all of  them originate in bile.  When bile

finds a means of discharge,  it boils up  and sends forth all sorts of tumours; but when imprisoned  within, it

generates many inflammatory diseases, above all when  mingled with pure  blood; since it then displaces the

fibres which are  scattered about in the  blood and are designed to maintain the balance  of rare and dense, in


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 80



Top




Page No 83


order  that the blood may not be so liquefied by  heat as to exude from the pores  of the body, nor again become

too  dense and thus find a difficulty in  circulating through the veins.  The fibres are so constituted as to

maintain this balance; and if any  one brings them all together when the  blood is dead and in process of

cooling, then the blood which remains  becomes fluid, but if they are  left alone, they soon congeal by reason

of  the surrounding cold.  The  fibres having this power over the blood, bile,  which is only stale  blood, and

which from being flesh is dissolved again  into blood, at  the first influx coming in little by little, hot and

liquid,  is  congealed by the power of the fibres; and so congealing and made to  cool, it produces internal cold

and shuddering.  When it enters with  more  of a flood and overcomes the fibres by its heat, and boiling up

throws them  into disorder, if it have power enough to maintain its  supremacy, it  penetrates the marrow and

burns up what may be termed  the cables of the  soul, and sets her free; but when there is not so  much of it, and

the body  though wasted still holds out, the bile is  itself mastered, and is either  utterly banished, or is thrust

through  the veins into the lower or upper  belly, and is driven out of the body  like an exile from a state in

which  there has been civil war; whence  arise diarrhoeas and dysenteries, and all  such disorders.  When the

constitution is disordered by excess of fire,  continuous heat and  fever are the result; when excess of air is the

cause,  then the fever  is quotidian; when of water, which is a more sluggish  element than  either fire or air, then

the fever is a tertian; when of  earth, which  is the most sluggish of the four, and is only purged away in a

fourfold period, the result is a quartan fever, which can with  difficulty  be shaken off. 

Such is the manner in which diseases of the body arise; the  disorders of  the soul, which depend upon the

body, originate as  follows.  We must  acknowledge disease of the mind to be a want of  intelligence; and of this

there are two kinds; to wit, madness and  ignorance.  In whatever state a  man experiences either of them, that

state may be called disease; and  excessive pains and pleasures are  justly to be regarded as the greatest

diseases to which the soul is  liable.  For a man who is in great joy or in  great pain, in his  unreasonable

eagerness to attain the one and to avoid  the other, is  not able to see or to hear anything rightly; but he is mad,

and is at  the time utterly incapable of any participation in reason.  He  who has  the seed about the spinal

marrow too plentiful and overflowing,  like a  tree overladen with fruit, has many throes, and also obtains

many  pleasures in his desires and their offspring, and is for the most part  of  his life deranged, because his

pleasures and pains are so very  great; his  soul is rendered foolish and disordered by his body; yet he  is

regarded not  as one diseased, but as one who is voluntarily bad,  which is a mistake.  The truth is that the

intemperance of love is a  disease of the soul due  chiefly to the moisture and fluidity which is  produced in one

of the  elements by the loose consistency of the bones.  And in general, all that  which is termed the

incontinence of pleasure  and is deemed a reproach under  the idea that the wicked voluntarily do  wrong is not

justly a matter for  reproach.  For no man is voluntarily  bad; but the bad become bad by reason  of an ill

disposition of the  body and bad education, things which are  hateful to every man and  happen to him against

his will.  And in the case  of pain too in like  manner the soul suffers much evil from the body.  For  where the

acid  and briny phlegm and other bitter and bilious humours wander  about in  the body, and find no exit or

escape, but are pent up within and  mingle their own vapours with the motions of the soul, and are blended

with  them, they produce all sorts of diseases, more or fewer, and in  every  degree of intensity; and being

carried to the three places of  the soul,  whichever they may severally assail, they create infinite  varieties of

illtemper and melancholy, of rashness and cowardice, and  also of  forgetfulness and stupidity.  Further, when

to this evil  constitution of  body evil forms of government are added and evil  discourses are uttered in  private

as well as in public, and no sort of  instruction is given in youth  to cure these evils, then all of us who  are bad

become bad from two causes  which are entirely beyond our  control.  In such cases the planters are to  blame

rather than the  plants, the educators rather than the educated.  But  however that may  be, we should endeavour

as far as we can by education, and  studies,  and learning, to avoid vice and attain virtue; this, however, is  part

of another subject. 

There is a corresponding enquiry concerning the mode of treatment  by which  the mind and the body are to be

preserved, about which it is  meet and right  that I should say a word in turn; for it is more our  duty to speak of

the  good than of the evil.  Everything that is good  is fair, and the fair is  not without proportion, and the animal

which  is to be fair must have due  proportion.  Now we perceive lesser  symmetries or proportions and reason


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 81



Top




Page No 84


about them, but of the highest  and greatest we take no heed; for there is  no proportion or  disproportion more

productive of health and disease, and  virtue and  vice, than that between soul and body.  This however we do

not  perceive, nor do we reflect that when a weak or small frame is the  vehicle  of a great and mighty soul, or

conversely, when a little soul  is encased in  a large body, then the whole animal is not fair, for it  lacks the

most  important of all symmetries; but the due proportion of  mind and body is the  fairest and loveliest of all

sights to him who  has the seeing eye.  Just as  a body which has a leg too long, or which  is unsymmetrical in

some other  respect, is an unpleasant sight, and  also, when doing its share of work, is  much distressed and

makes  convulsive efforts, and often stumbles through  awkwardness, and is the  cause of infinite evil to its own

selfin like  manner we should  conceive of the double nature which we call the living  being; and when  in

this compound there is an impassioned soul more powerful  than the  body, that soul, I say, convulses and fills

with disorders the  whole  inner nature of man; and when eager in the pursuit of some sort of  learning or study,

causes wasting; or again, when teaching or  disputing in  private or in public, and strifes and controversies

arise, inflames and  dissolves the composite frame of man and  introduces rheums; and the nature  of this

phenomenon is not understood  by most professors of medicine, who  ascribe it to the opposite of the  real

cause.  And once more, when a body  large and too strong for the  soul is united to a small and weak

intelligence, then inasmuch as  there are two desires natural to man,one  of food for the sake of the  body,

and one of wisdom for the sake of the  diviner part of usthen,  I say, the motions of the stronger, getting the

better and increasing  their own power, but making the soul dull, and  stupid, and forgetful,  engender

ignorance, which is the greatest of  diseases.  There is one  protection against both kinds of disproportion:

that we should not  move the body without the soul or the soul without the  body, and thus  they will be on their

guard against each other, and be  healthy and  well balanced.  And therefore the mathematician or any one else

whose  thoughts are much absorbed in some intellectual pursuit, must allow  his body also to have due

exercise, and practise gymnastic; and he who  is  careful to fashion the body, should in turn impart to the soul

its  proper  motions, and should cultivate music and all philosophy, if he  would deserve  to be called truly fair

and truly good.  And the  separate parts should be  treated in the same manner, in imitation of  the pattern of the

universe;  for as the body is heated and also cooled  within by the elements which  enter into it, and is again

dried up and  moistened by external things, and  experiences these and the like  affections from both kinds of

motions, the  result is that the body if  given up to motion when in a state of quiescence  is overmastered and

perishes; but if any one, in imitation of that which we  call the  fostermother and nurse of the universe, will

not allow the body  ever  to be inactive, but is always producing motions and agitations through  its whole

extent, which form the natural defence against other motions  both  internal and external, and by moderate

exercise reduces to order  according  to their affinities the particles and affections which are  wandering about

the body, as we have already said when speaking of the  universe, he will  not allow enemy placed by the side

of enemy to stir  up wars and disorders  in the body, but he will place friend by the  side of friend, so as to

create health.  Now of all motions that is  the best which is produced in a  thing by itself, for it is most akin  to

the motion of thought and of the  universe; but that motion which is  caused by others is not so good, and  worst

of all is that which moves  the body, when at rest, in parts only and  by some external agency.  Wherefore of all

modes of purifying and re  uniting the body the best  is gymnastic; the next best is a surging motion,  as in

sailing or any  other mode of conveyance which is not fatiguing; the  third sort of  motion may be of use in a

case of extreme necessity, but in  any other  will be adopted by no man of sense:  I mean the purgative

treatment of  physicians; for diseases unless they are very dangerous should  not be  irritated by medicines,

since every form of disease is in a manner  akin to the living being, whose complex frame has an appointed

term of  life.  For not the whole race only, but each individualbarring  inevitable  accidentscomes into the

world having a fixed span, and  the triangles in  us are originally framed with power to last for a  certain time,

beyond  which no man can prolong his life.  And this  holds also of the constitution  of diseases; if any one

regardless of  the appointed time tries to subdue  them by medicine, he only  aggravates and multiplies them.

Wherefore we  ought always to manage  them by regimen, as far as a man can spare the time,  and not provoke

a  disagreeable enemy by medicines. 

Enough of the composite animal, and of the body which is a part of  him, and  of the manner in which a man

may train and be trained by  himself so as to  live most according to reason:  and we must above and  before all


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 82



Top




Page No 85


provide  that the element which is to train him shall be the  fairest and best  adapted to that purpose.  A minute

discussion of this  subject would be a  serious task; but if, as before, I am to give only  an outline, the subject

may not unfitly be summed up as follows. 

I have often remarked that there are three kinds of soul located  within us,  having each of them motions, and I

must now repeat in the  fewest words  possible, that one part, if remaining inactive and  ceasing from its natural

motion, must necessarily become very weak,  but that which is trained and  exercised, very strong.  Wherefore

we  should take care that the movements  of the different parts of the soul  should be in due proportion. 

And we should consider that God gave the sovereign part of the  human soul  to be the divinity of each one,

being that part which, as  we say, dwells at  the top of the body, and inasmuch as we are a plant  not of an

earthly but  of a heavenly growth, raises us from earth to  our kindred who are in  heaven.  And in this we say

truly; for the  divine power suspended the head  and root of us from that place where  the generation of the soul

first  began, and thus made the whole body  upright.  When a man is always occupied  with the cravings of

desire  and ambition, and is eagerly striving to  satisfy them, all his  thoughts must be mortal, and, as far as it is

possible altogether to  become such, he must be mortal every whit, because  he has cherished  his mortal part.

But he who has been earnest in the love  of knowledge  and of true wisdom, and has exercised his intellect

more than  any  other part of him, must have thoughts immortal and divine, if he attain  truth, and in so far as

human nature is capable of sharing in  immortality,  he must altogether be immortal; and since he is ever

cherishing the divine  power, and has the divinity within him in  perfect order, he will be  perfectly happy.  Now

there is only one way  of taking care of things, and  this is to give to each the food and  motion which are

natural to it.  And  the motions which are naturally  akin to the divine principle within us are  the thoughts and

revolutions of the universe.  These each man should  follow, and  correct the courses of the head which were

corrupted at our  birth, and  by learning the harmonies and revolutions of the universe,  should  assimilate the

thinking being to the thought, renewing his original  nature, and having assimilated them should attain to that

perfect life  which the gods have set before mankind, both for the present and the  future. 

Thus our original design of discoursing about the universe down to  the  creation of man is nearly completed.

A brief mention may be made  of the  generation of other animals, so far as the subject admits of  brevity; in

this manner our argument will best attain a due  proportion.  On the subject  of animals, then, the following

remarks  may be offered.  Of the men who  came into the world, those who were  cowards or led unrighteous

lives may  with reason be supposed to have  changed into the nature of women in the  second generation.  And

this  was the reason why at that time the gods  created in us the desire of  sexual intercourse, contriving in man

one  animated substance, and in  woman another, which they formed respectively in  the following manner.  The

outlet for drink by which liquids pass through  the lung under the  kidneys and into the bladder, which receives

and then by  the pressure  of the air emits them, was so fashioned by them as to  penetrate also  into the body of

the marrow, which passes from the head  along the neck  and through the back, and which in the preceding

discourse  we have  named the seed.  And the seed having life, and becoming endowed  with  respiration,

produces in that part in which it respires a lively  desire of emission, and thus creates in us the love of

procreation.  Wherefore also in men the organ of generation becoming rebellious and  masterful, like an animal

disobedient to reason, and maddened with the  sting of lust, seeks to gain absolute sway; and the same is the

case  with  the socalled womb or matrix of women; the animal within them is  desirous  of procreating

children, and when remaining unfruitful long  beyond its  proper time, gets discontented and angry, and

wandering in  every direction  through the body, closes up the passages of the  breath, and, by obstructing

respiration, drives them to extremity,  causing all varieties of disease,  until at length the desire and love  of the

man and the woman, bringing them  together and as it were  plucking the fruit from the tree, sow in the womb,

as in a field,  animals unseen by reason of their smallness and without  form; these  again are separated and

matured within; they are then finally  brought  out into the light, and thus the generation of animals is

completed. 


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 83



Top




Page No 86


Thus were created women and the female sex in general.  But the  race of  birds was created out of innocent

lightminded men, who,  although their  minds were directed toward heaven, imagined, in their  simplicity, that

the  clearest demonstration of the things above was to  be obtained by sight;  these were remodelled and

transformed into  birds, and they grew feathers  instead of hair.  The race of wild  pedestrian animals, again,

came from  those who had no philosophy in  any of their thoughts, and never considered  at all about the nature

of  the heavens, because they had ceased to use the  courses of the head,  but followed the guidance of those

parts of the soul  which are in the  breast.  In consequence of these habits of theirs they had  their  frontlegs and

their heads resting upon the earth to which they were  drawn by natural affinity; and the crowns of their heads

were  elongated and  of all sorts of shapes, into which the courses of the  soul were crushed by  reason of disuse.

And this was the reason why  they were created quadrupeds  and polypods:  God gave the more  senseless of

them the more support that  they might be more attracted  to the earth.  And the most foolish of them,  who trail

their bodies  entirely upon the ground and have no longer any need  of feet, he made  without feet to crawl upon

the earth.  The fourth class  were the  inhabitants of the water:  these were made out of the most  entirely

senseless and ignorant of all, whom the transformers did not think  any  longer worthy of pure respiration,

because they possessed a soul which  was made impure by all sorts of transgression; and instead of the  subtle

and pure medium of air, they gave them the deep and muddy sea  to be their  element of respiration; and hence

arose the race of fishes  and oysters, and  other aquatic animals, which have received the most  remote

habitations as a  punishment of their outlandish ignorance.  These are the laws by which  animals pass into one

another, now, as  ever, changing as they lose or gain  wisdom and folly. 

We may now say that our discourse about the nature of the universe  has an  end.  The world has received

animals, mortal and immortal, and  is fulfilled  with them, and has become a visible animal containing the

visiblethe  sensible God who is the image of the intellectual, the  greatest, best,  fairest, most perfectthe

one onlybegotten heaven. 


Timaeus

TIMAEUS. 84



Top





Bookmarks



1. Table of Contents, page = 3

2. Timaeus, page = 4

   3. Plato, page = 4

   4. INTRODUCTION AND ANALYSIS., page = 4

   5. TIMAEUS., page = 51